Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
ProfessionalFundamentals
(metric)
BentleyInstituteCourseGuide
TRN017720-1/0002
TrademarkNotice
Bentleyandthe"B"Bentleylogoareeitherregisteredorunregisteredtrademarksor
servicemarksofBentleySystems,Incorporated.Allothermarksarethepropertyoftheir
respectiveowners.
AccuDraw,MDL,MicroStation,andSmartLineareregisteredtrademarks;PopSetand
RasterManageraretrademarks.
AutoCADisaregisteredtrademarkofAutodesk,Inc.
CopyrightNotice
Copyright2012,BentleySystems,Incorporated.AllRightsReserved.
Mar-12
TableofContents
ProSteelV8iProfessionalFundamentalsOverview ________ 9
CourseDescription ____________________________________ 9
ProSteelV8iMicroStationModelingFundamentals ________ 11
ModelingFundamentalsOverview _____________________ 13
CourseDescription ____________________________________ 13
WhatisProSteelV8i? __________________________________ 13
Prerequisites _________________________________________ 13
CourseObjectives _____________________________________ 14
ModulesIncluded _____________________________________ 14
SeedFileandModelSetup ____________________________ 15
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 15
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 15
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 15
IntroductoryKnowledge ________________________________ 16
Questions ________________________________________ 16
Answers__________________________________________ 16
TrainingDatasetInstallation _____________________________ 17
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation ____________________ 18
Units&MeasurementValues_________________________ 20
ProSteelOptions(DefaultSettings) ____________________ 21
ModuleReview _______________________________________ 40
Questions ________________________________________ 40
Answers__________________________________________ 41
ModuleSummary _____________________________________ 42
ViewingandMovingAroundtheModel _________________ 43
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 43
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 43
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 43
IntroductoryKnowledge ________________________________ 44
Questions ________________________________________ 44
Answers__________________________________________ 45
Mar-12
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Lesson1:UtilizingStructuralViewTools____________________ 46
GlobalViews ______________________________________ 46
ChangingtheModelView____________________________ 47
Lesson2:UnderstandingandManipulatingClippingPlanes ____ 51
ModuleReview _______________________________________ 53
Questions ________________________________________ 53
Answers__________________________________________ 54
DrawingandEditingShapesandWorkframes ____________ 55
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 55
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 55
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 55
IntroductoryKnowledge ________________________________ 56
Questions ________________________________________ 56
Answers__________________________________________ 57
HandleEditing ________________________________________ 58
DrawingSteelShapesintheModel _______________________ 62
EditingSteelShapesandPlates___________________________ 72
ModuleReview _______________________________________ 80
Questions ________________________________________ 80
Answers__________________________________________ 81
CreatingaWorkframe _______________________________ 83
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 83
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 83
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 83
IntroductoryKnowledge ________________________________ 84
Questions ________________________________________ 84
Answers__________________________________________ 85
CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings _________________ 86
CreatingandManipulatingDisplayClasses,AreaClasses
andPartFamilies ______________________________________ 98
DisplayClasses ____________________________________ 98
AreaClasses ______________________________________ 100
PartFamilies ______________________________________ 101
NorthDirection _______________________________________ 104
UserDefinedPartDescription ________________________ 106
UserDefinedtemplates _____________________________ 107
ModuleReview _______________________________________ 109
Questions ________________________________________ 109
Answers__________________________________________ 110
Mar-12
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 111
IntroductoryKnowledge ________________________________ 112
Questions ________________________________________ 112
Answers__________________________________________ 113
InsertingSteelShapesUsingtheLine ______________________ 114
AssigningSteelMemberstoaDisplayClass _________________ 118
InsertingSteelShapesUsingthe2PointMethod_____________ 119
ModuleReview _______________________________________ 122
Questions ________________________________________ 122
Answers__________________________________________ 122
Mar-12
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
StructuralElements__________________________________ 201
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 201
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 201
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 202
CreatingtheHandrail __________________________________ 203
CreatingtheStairs _____________________________________ 209
LadderandFrameStructuralElements_____________________ 218
CreatingCustomWorkframes(View) ______________________ 224
UserDefinedStylesandSymbols_______________________ 255
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 255
Lesson1:UserDefinedStyles ____________________________ 255
BoltStyle _________________________________________ 256
DetailStyle___________________________________________ 260
ElevationFlagStyle _________________________________ 260
PositionFlagStyle __________________________________ 261
WeldFlagStyle ____________________________________ 261
Lesson2:UserDefinedSymbols __________________________ 264
Benchmarksymbol(northdirection) ___________________ 264
ElevationFlagsSymbol ______________________________ 266
GridTextBlocksSymbol _____________________________ 267
ManualCutSymbol_________________________________ 268
Mar-12
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Mar-12
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
DetailStyles________________________________________ 363
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 363
SavingStyles ______________________________________ 363
PartialLoadingofStyleParameters ____________________ 364
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 364
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 364
Example1:AnchorPlan_________________________________ 365
Example2:SinglePartDetailStyle_________________________ 373
SampleShapeDetailDrawing_________________________ 376
Example3:BeamGroupDetail ___________________________ 377
Example4:MarkingElevationDetail ______________________ 383
Mar-12
Table of Contents
ProSteelV8iProfessional
FundamentalsOverview
CourseDescription
TheProSteelV8iMicroStationProfessionalFundamentalscourseiscomposedof
twoparts:ModelingFundamentalsandDetailingFundamentals.
ModelingFundamentalsallowsyoutomodelyouractualstructureinamanner
similartoactualerectionofthestructure.Thismodelisthenusedbytheprogram
toautomaticallygeneratetherequired2Dshopdrawings.
Afteryouhavecreatedamodel,completedyouredits,andpossiblyissueda
preliminarypartslist,thecreationsofthe2Dlayouts(plan,elevationsand
sectionsofthebuilding)canbegin.ThiswillbecoveredintheDetailing
Fundamentalspartofthiscourse.
Mar-12
Course Description
10
Mar-12
ProSteelV8iMicroStation
ModelingFundamentals
ProSteelV8i
BentleyInstituteCourseGuide
12
Mar-12
ModelingFundamentals
Overview
CourseDescription
ThischapterprovidesanoverviewoftheBentleyProSteelV8iMicroStation
Modelingcourse.
WhatisProSteelV8i?
BentleyProSteelV8i(PSV8i)isastructuralsteelconstructionapplicationfor
AutoCAD.IfyouhavepreviouslyusedtraditionalAutoCADtoolsorother2D
applicationstocreatesteelconstructiondrawings,youwillneedtoadjusttoa
newmethodofcreatingdrawings.ProSteel3Dallowsyoutomodelyouractual
structureinamannersimilartoactualerectionofthestructure.Thismodelis
thenusedbytheprogramtoautomaticallygeneratetherequired2Dshop
drawings.
Inthiscourse,youwillcoverthebasicsoftheProSteelModelingfunctionalityand
howtotakeadvantageofMicroStationtoolswhileusingProSteel.
Prerequisites
Mar-12
Engineeringbackgroundinstructuralsteelconstruction
AfundamentalknowledgeorpreviouscourseinMicroStation3Dis
advantageous
13
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Course Objectives
CourseObjectives
Aftercompletingthiscourse,youwillbeableto:
UseProSteelV8iModelingsuccessfullyonaproject
ModulesIncluded
Thefollowingmodulesareincludedinthiscourse:
TemplatesandModelSetup
ViewingandMovingAroundtheModel
DrawingandEditingShapesandWorkframes
CreatingaWorkframe
InsertingandManipulatingShapes
CreatingConnectionsBetweenElements
CreatingBasePlatesandCrossBracing
ConstructionGroups
PurlinCourses,WebAngles,andShearPlateConnections
StructuralElements
PositioningandMaterialTakeoffs
CreatingDrawings
14
Mar-12
SeedFileandModelSetup
ModuleOverview
ThismodulecoversthecreationoftheProSteelMicroStationprojectand
establishingaMicroStationdgnseedfileusedwhenstartinganewBentley
ProSteelV8imodel.Inaddition,youwilllearnhowtosetProSteelV8ioptions
and/ordefaultsettings.
ModulePrerequisites
BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.
Previousexperiencewitha3DCADsystem,preferablyMicroStationV8i
ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:
Mar-12
Installthetrainingdataset
EstablishtheProSteelprojectforMicroStation
StartProSteelforMicroStation
OpentheSeedmodeldgn
BecomeknowledgeableoftheUnitsofMeasureandDesignFileworkingunits
andhowtheyrelate
AccesstheProSteelOptionsdialog
Learnwhatiscontrolledbythesettingsinthisdialogandhowtoobtainhelp
forfurtherexplanation
15
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Introductory Knowledge
IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeginthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.
Questions
1
HowdoyoustartaWindowsExplorersession?
HowdoyoucreateanewfolderinWindows?
InMicroStationaLevelisequivalenttoa______inAutoCAD?
InMicroStation,aLineStyleisequivalentto_____inAutoCAD?
Answers
1
HowdoyoustartaWindowsExplorersession?
RightmouseclickontheWindowsStartbutton,thenselectExplore.
HowdoyoucreateanewfolderinWindows?
Navigatetothelocationofwhereyouwantthenewfoldertoresideand
rightmouseclickinablankareaoftherighthandcolumnofthe
WindowsExplorersession.ThenselectNew,thenFolder.
InMicroStationaLevelisequivalenttoaLayerinAutoCAD.
InMicroStationaLineStyleisequivalenttoLineTypeinAutoCAD.
16
Mar-12
TrainingDatasetInstallation
TrainingDatasetInstallation
Thistopicwillcovertheinstallationofthetrainingdatasetandtheestablishment
oftheProSteelProjectforMicroStation.
Exercise:Installingthetrainingdataset
1
CreateanewfolderinC:namedProSteelWorkspaceTemp
MovethedeliveredWorkspace.zipintothenewfolder
RightmouseclickontheWorkspace.zipanddoan"ExtractHere"fromthe
rightclickmenu
NavigateintheWorkspacefolderto
C:\ProSteelWorkSpaceTemp\WorkSpace\Projects\Examples
OpenanotherWindowsExplorersession
Inthenewwindow,navigatetoC:\DocumentsandSettings\All
Users\ApplicationData\Bentley\MicroStation\WorkSpace
\Projects\Examples
CopytheProSteelFolderandtheProSteel.pcffrom
C:\ProSteelWorkSpaceTemp\WorkSpace\Projects\Examplesto
C:\DocumentsandSettings\AllUsers\ApplicationData\
Bentley\MicroStation\WorkSpace\Projects\Examples
Yourwindowshouldlookliketheoneabove.ThisestablishestheProSteel
ProjectforMicroStation.
Mar-12
17
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation
ThistopiccoversstartingProSteelV8iandopeningthemodelseedfile.
ProSteelV8ihasallthecapabilitiesofMicroStation,plusfeaturesthataccelerate
andeaseworkingonmodelsofsteelstructures.
Exercise:StartingProSteel
1
StartProSteel(WindowsStartmenu>AllPrograms>ProSteelV8i)or
doubleclicktheProSteelV8iicononyourdesktop.
IntheFileopendialog,setthefollowing:
User:examples
Project:ProSteel
Interface:default
Lookin:ProSteelseed,thenopentraining_ProSteel3D_V8i_Metric.dgn
Note:IntheLookinareaoftheFileOpendialog,youmightneedtonavigate
uponeleveltotheProSteelfolderandthentotheseedfolder.
3
IftheinitialseedfilewerenotaProSteelseedfilesuchasoneofthe3D
seedfilesdeliveredwithMicroStation,thefollowingdialogwillappear.If
thishappens,selectMetric(MeasurementUnit)forthistraining.However,
iftheprojectisinimperialunitstheoptiontosetupfortheseunitsis
providedhere.
18
Mar-12
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation
MicroStationwillstartandloadtheProSteelV8i
menuandtoolbars,whichprovidesaccesstoan
integratedsetofProSteelDesignapplications
andsupplementalutilities.
Mar-12
19
Units&MeasurementValues
ThistopicprovidesintroductoryknowledgetoUnitsofMeasureusedbyProSteel
andhowtheyrelatetoMicroStationDesignFileWorkingUnits.
ProSteelusesMicroStationunits,soyoumustsetyourunitsasyounormallydo
withMicroStation.Keepinmindyouwillhavetosettheunitsforthe3Dmodel
andthe2Ddrawingfiles.Thiscanbeachievedinadvanceofmodelordrawing
creationbypreparingdgnseedfilesformodellingandfor2Ddrawings.
ConsequentlyProSteelalsoneedsanothervariabletobesetproperlyinorderto
beabletoinsertthesteelshapesintheproperdimensions.Letusexplainhere
howitallworks.
ShapeDatabasesarepopulatedwithalltheinformationneededtobuildeach
steelshape.Theinformationintheshape'sdatabasesiseitherinmetricor
imperialvalues.ProSteelknowswhichsystemwasusedineachdatabasethanks
totheshapeconfiguration.
Onceinsideadgnfile,ProSteelneedstoknowwhatsystemisgoingtobeused
there.
Asaresult,ProSteelcannowtellifitneedstoconvertthesizeofashapereadon
ametricdatabasetobeinsertedintoametric(noconversionneeded)oran
imperial(25.4scaledownfactor)model.
Thesetwosettings(Units&Measurement)areveryimportantinProSteel.We
stronglyrecommendyousettheseupinsideaseedfileforeachpossible
combinationyoumightneedsoyoudonotneedtoworryaboutiteveragain.
Exercise:SettheDesignFileWorkingunits
1
TosettheDesignfileworkingunitsgotoSetting>Designfile>Working
Unitssetasbelow.
20
Mar-12
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation
Note:Oncethemodelisstartedineithermeasurementsystem,itcannotbe
convertedtotheothermeasurementsystem.
ProSteelOptions(DefaultSettings)
ThistopicwilldiscussProSteelsetupoptionsanddemonstratehowtoaccessthe
OptionsDialog.Itwillalsorevealhowtoobtainadditionalinformationonthe
varioussettings.
HerewewilltakealookattheProSteelV8isettingsdonewithinProSteelV8i.
KeepinmindthatbecauseProSteelV8ineedstodifferentiatemetricfrom
imperialdrawings,thesesettingsexistindouble.
WhenProSteelV8iinstallsitshouldbydefaultgiveyouaccesstothetemplates
includedintheinstallation.
Youcanmodifythesesettingsandsavethemastemplatesforeachdifferent
situationthatyouneed(perproject,perclient,perjob,etc).
Mar-12
Exercise:AccessingtheSettings
1
Thetraining_ProSteel3D_V8i_Metric.dgnshouldstillbeopen.Ifnot,
reopenusingProSteel.
OpentheProSteelOptions(ProSteelV8imenu>ProSteelOptions)dialog
shownbelow.
21
Thismultitabbeddialogcontainsthedefaultsettingsdata,orglobal
settingsinformation,forthemodel.
3
AssigntheOptionsoptionparametersshownbelow,thengotothenext
selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
OK...SaveschangestothesettingsmodifiedinanysectionoftheDialog
madeafterthedialogwereopenedlast.TheusermustalsodoaFile>
SaveSettingsbeforeexitingtheMicroStationsessiontomaintainthe
settingschanges.
CancelsanychangesmadesinceopeningthedialogandafterthelastOK.
OpenstheProSteelHelpdocumentpertinenttothesettingsinthedialog.
Providesamethodofsavingthesettingstoatemplateforuselater.
22
Mar-12
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation
AssigntheGripsoptionparametersshownbelow,thengotothenext
selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
AssigntheShapesoptionparametersshownbelow,thengotothenext
selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
Mar-12
23
AssigntheShapeLabeloptionparametersshownbelow,thengotothe
nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
TextSizeandDistancearerelativeto1MasterUnit(MU)inthe
MicroStationdgn.
7
AssigntheSketchDisplayoptionparametersshownbelow,thengotothe
nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
24
Mar-12
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation
AssigntheNamingConventionsoptionparametersasshownbelow,then
gotothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
Hint: DialogsinMicroStationareWindowscompliant.Thisenablesthemtobe
"rippedoutof"theMicroStationsessionwindowandmakescomparingwhatis
beingdisplayedintheMicroStationdialogtothegraphicabovemucheasierby
bringingthedialogclosertothegraphic.
9
AssigntheFlatSteelSelectionoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengo
tothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
Mar-12
25
10 AssigntheStraightPlatesoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengoto
thenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
11 AssignthePlateLabeloptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothe
nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
26
Mar-12
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation
12 AssignthePlateDescriptionoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengo
tothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
13 AssigntheCalculationMethodoptionparametersasshownbelow,then
gotothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
Mar-12
27
14 AssigntheBoltsoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothenext
selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
15 AssigntheWorkframeoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothe
nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
28
Mar-12
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation
16 AssigntheAssemblyoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothe
nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
17 AssigntheValuesoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothenext
selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
(Continuationbelow)
Mar-12
29
18 AssigntheLogicalLinksoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothe
nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
Note: The"allowadditionaldata"checkboxaffectsonlytheDetailCenter.
30
Mar-12
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation
19 AssigntheRevisionCheckoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengoto
thenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
Note: Donotsettheseto"Asktodeletepositionnumbers".
20 AssigntheDisplayoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothenext
selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
Mar-12
31
21 AssigntheColoursoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothenext
selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
ColoursOptionssettingscontinued:
(Continuation)
32
Mar-12
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation
22 AssigntheMonitorColoursoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengoto
thenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
Mar-12
33
23 AssigntheConfiguration/IsometricViewoptionparametersasshown
below,thengotothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedall
settings.
24 AssigntheLayeroptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothenext
selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
(Continuationbelow)
34
Mar-12
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation
(Continuation)
Mar-12
35
25 AssigntheFlatSteelSelectionoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengo
tothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
26 AssigntheDialogSettingsoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengoto
thenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
36
Mar-12
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation
27 AssigntheTooltipsoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothe
nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
28 AssigntheClasses/Familiesoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengo
tothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
Mar-12
37
29 AssigntheMatchPropertiesoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengo
tothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
30 Whenallofthesettingshavebeenset,pressOKtoapplyallofthesettings
totheProSteelmodel.
31 FromtheMicroStationFiledropdown,clickonFile>SaveSettings.
32 SetDialogSettingsoptiontoExpertMode.
AnadditionalfieldwillbeaddedtoProSteelOptions.
38
Mar-12
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation
Hint: Afterdoingsomeconfigurationsusingtheexpertmode,alwayssetitbackto
beginnermode.
Mar-12
39
Module Review
ModuleReview
Nowthatyouhavecompletedthismodule,let'smeasurewhatyouhavelearned.
Questions
1
WhatdirectoryisthedefaultlocationforMicroStationprojects?
Tomakeitmoreconvenienttocreatenewmodelfiles,whereshouldthe
ProSteelsetupoptionsbemade?
WherearetheDesignFileworkingunitsset?
Howcansomeoneobtainmorehelponexplainingthesetupoptions?
40
Mar-12
ModuleReview
Answers
1
WhatdirectoryisthedefaultlocationforMicroStationprojects?
C:\DocumentsandSettings\AllUsers\Application
Data\Bentley\MicroStation\WorkSpace\Projects
Tomakeitmoreconvenienttocreatenewmodelfiles,whereshouldthe
ProSteelsetupoptionsbemade?
IntheProjectSeedFile.Thenusetheseedfiletocreatenewmodels.
WherearetheDesignFileworkingunitsset?
FromtheMicroStationDropDownmenu,selectSettings>DesignFile>
WorkingUnits.
Howcansomeoneobtainmorehelponexplainingthesetupoptions?
ClickonthisiconintheProSteelOptionsdialog,whichwilltakeyou
directlytothesectionoftheProSteelHelppertainingtotheOptions
settings.
Mar-12
41
Module Summary
ModuleSummary
Youarenowableto:
Installthetrainingdataset
EstablishtheProSteelprojectforMicroStation
StartProSteelforMicroStation
OpentheSeedmodeldgn
SettheDesignFileworkingunitsandhaveanunderstandingofhowthey
relatetoProSteel'sUnitsofMeasure
AccesstheProSteelOptionsdialog
AdjustthesettingsintheProSteelOptionsdialogtosuityourparticular
projectneedsandknowhowtoobtainhelpforfurtherexplanationofthese
settings.
42
Mar-12
ViewingandMovingAround
theModel
ModuleOverview
Inthismodule,youwilllearnaboutProSteel'sViewmanipulationfunctions.The
ProSteeltoolsprovidedtoadjusttheMicroStationACSwillalsobecovered.
TherearetwoLessonsinthismodule.EachLessonbeginswithalistofobjectives
thatdefinetheinformationthatyouwilllearninthatLesson.Anumberof
ExercisesareprovidedineachLesson,whicharedesignedtoteachyouthestated
objectives.
ModulePrerequisites
BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationandsoforth
Previousexperiencewitha3DCADsystem,preferablyMicroStationV8i
Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended
ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:
Mar-12
Changetheviewofthemodel
Centerashapeintheview
SettheACSbyashapeeitheratapointorcenteredontheshape
UnderstandwhatClippingPlanesareandhowtheyaffecttheviewofthe
model
Turnclippingplanesonandoff
Changetheclippingplanedistancessoastochangetheresultantview
43
Introductory Knowledge
IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeginthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.
Questions
1
WhatisACSandwhatisitusedfor?
HowisaClippingPlaneusefulin3Ddesignwork?
IftheACSTriadwasn'tshowing,whichoftheoptionsbelowcouldyouuse
tomakeitvisible?
CloseMicroStationandhopeitbecomesvisiblewhenyourestart.
TurnontheACSleveltomakeitvisible.
EnableitsdisplayinViewAttributesDialog.
SetitintheDisplayTaboftheProSteelOptions.
44
Mar-12
IntroductoryKnowledge
Answers
1
WhatisACSandwhatisitusedfor?
AnAuxiliaryCoordinateSystem(ACS)isdefinedsothatyoucanplace
elementsonplanesatdifferentdepthsandorientations.
HowisaClippingPlaneusefulin3Ddesignwork?
FrontandBackClippingPlanesdefinethelimitsofvisibleelements,
effectivelystoppingyoufromseeinganythingthatisoutsideofthe
clippingplanes.
Itisusedtoremovethedisplayofunwantedelementsmakingiteasierto
focusonthoseelementsyouaredesigningormodifyingatthemoment.
IftheACSTriadwasn'tshowing,whichoftheoptionsbelowcouldyouuse
tomakeitvisible?
Mar-12
EnableitsdisplayinViewAttributesDialog.
45
Lesson1:UtilizingStructuralViewTools
DifferenttypesofviewsareavailableinProSteelV8i.Someareautomatically
createdwhileothersareuserdefined/created;theyareallviewingtoolsserving
thesamepurposetomakeworkingina3Denvironmentmucheasierthanplain
MicroStationtools.Theseviewscan/willalsobeusedtocreateengineering2D
plans,elevations,andbuildingcrosssectionsaswellasfabricators'erection
drawings.
GlobalViews
ProSteelV8iprovidesfiveisometricviewpointsgeneratedaspersettingsinthe
ProSteelV8iGlobalSettingsdiscussedintheSeedFileandModelSetupmodule.
Wewillnowexplainhowthesesettingswork.
46
Mar-12
Lesson1:UtilizingStructuralViewTools
Theseviewscanbeusedtonavigateinthemodelaswellastogenerateisometric
viewsofthewholestructureorofindividualparts,assembliesorconnection
details.
Byclickinganyofthefiveprovidedviews,youwillnoticetheviewingdirectionof
themodelchangesaccordingtothosesettings.
ChangingtheModelView
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtochangetheviewofthemodelutilizing
ProSteel'sOverviewandChooseViewcommands.
Mar-12
47
Exercise:ChangingtheViewWithintheModel
1
OpentheVIEWMOD.dgntrainingdrawing(Filemenu>Open).
BrowsetotheDESIGNSdirectory.SelectVIEWMOD.DGNdrawingfileand
thenpressOpen.
Displaythemodelinanisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
Tryouttheotherviewtoolsinthismenu.Additionalviewcommandsare
providedintheProSteelZoom/Viewtoolbar.Whenyouarefinished,
returnthedrawingtotheIsometricOverviewview.
Anotherveryeffectivemethodofchangingtheviewonthemodelisby
usingtheChooseViewcommand.Thisfunctioncontainspredefined
views,whichareautomaticallycreatedwhenaworkframeiscreated.This
simplifiestheprocessofviewingamodelfromanyofthestandard
directionalviews(e.g.,Front,Right,Leftetc.).
OpentheSelectViewdialog(ProSteelmenu>Zoom/Views>Choose
View)orclicktheSelectViewicon.
SelecttheF1_TOPview,andthenpresstheSettheCurrentViewbutton.
Noticehowtheviewischangedtomatchtheselectedviewname.Execute
theOverviewcommandandswitchbacktotheOverview1view.
SelecttheChooseViewcommandagain.SelecttheTOPviewandthen
pressSetACS.NoticehowtheACSischangedtotheviewbuttheviewof
themodeldoesnotchange.
48
Mar-12
Lesson1:UtilizingStructuralViewTools
Exercise:SwitchingtoanObjectView(ObjectViewTools)
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoswitchtheviewinthemodelsoaselected
shapewillbesetasthecurrentviewandwillhavetheMicroStationACSsetto
thisshape.
1
OpentheBASICS_01.DGNtrainingdrawing(Filemenu>Open).Browseto
theDesignsdirectory.SelecttheBASICS_01.DGNfileandpressOpen.
Changetoviewtothecrosssectionofthebeam(UB203x133x25)
(ProSteelV8imenu>Zoom/Views>ObjectViewCentered)orclick
OverviewCenteredicon.
Mar-12
Pickthebeamlocatedattheanglewhosepartnameisdisplayed
(UB203x133x25).Whenpromptedwiththemulticoloureddirection
indicator,picktheaxishighlightedinyellowandthenclickyourleftmouse
buttontoaccepttheselection.
NoticehowtheACSisnowcenteredintheshapeandthemodelviewis
changedtothecrosssectionofthebeam.Experimentwiththisoptionby
pickingadifferentaxiswhenpromptedwiththedirectionindicator.
Noticethechangeinthemodelview.
49
Exercise:SwitchingtheACStoanObject(ObjectACSTools)
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtomovetheMicroStationACStoanobjectata
specificpointwithoutchangingthemodelview.
1
Resettheviewtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverview
icon).
CentertheACSontheUB356x171x57member(ProSteelV8imenu>
Zoom/Views>ObjectACScentered)orclickObjectACScenteredicon.
PickthesameUB356x171x57memberasabove,thenpickthesameleft
handaxis(yellow).ThistimenoticehowtheACSmovestotheobjectbut
theviewdoesnotchange.
Trythisagainandthistimepickadifferentaxisandnotethechangeofthe
ACSlocationandplane.
50
Mar-12
Lesson2:UnderstandingandManipulatingClippingPlanes
Lesson2:UnderstandingandManipulatingClippingPlanes
Inthissection,youwilllearnspecificallywhataClippingPlaneisandhowit
affectswhatyouseeinthemodel.
Workingwitha3Dmodelcanquicklybecomecomplex,especiallyifmanyparts
arespatiallystackedoroverlaponeanother.ByusingMicroStation"Clipping
Planes,"ProSteeloffersacommandtohidepartsinfrontofandbehindthe
currentworkplane,orthesocalledcuttingplane.
Thissimplifiestheconstructionprocesssignificantlysinceonlythoseobjects
approximatelyinthesameworkplanearevisible.Thispreventstheaccidental
manipulationofstackedshapes.Thetermapproximatelyisusedhereinthe
sensethatonlytheobjectswithintheClippingPlanescreatedarevisibletothe
frontandrear.
Ifoneofthedefinedviewsoranobjectviewisselected,thehideoptionis
activatedasthedefaultsettingunlessthecommandhasbeendeactivated
globally.
Thiscommandcanbeselectivelyactivatedordeactivatedtopermitviewingthe
depthsofallpartssimultaneouslyforageneraloverviewofthecomponentparts
ofthemodel(moreonthisinalaterexercise).
Mar-12
Exercise:WorkingwithClippingPlanes
1
OpentheVIEWMOD.DGNdrawing,changebacktothestandardisometric
view(clickIsometricOverviewicon).Noticethetwofronttorear
connectingmembers.Theelementontheleftsideoftheframeislowerin
elevationthantheelementontherightsideoftheframe.
ChangetotheleftsideviewF1_SIDE_L(clickChooseViewicon).
SelecttheF1_SIDE_LviewfromthedialogdisplayedandthenpressSet
View.Noticethatwhenthemodelregeneratesyouarenowintheleft
handview,butareunabletoseethememberontherightsideofthe
frame.Thisisbecausetheclippingplanedistancefortheleftframeviewis
setto450mmandthememberlocatedontherightsideoftheframeis
outsideofthisrange.
ChangetotherightsideviewF1_SIDE_R(clickChooseViewicon).
ThenselecttheF1_SIDE_RviewfromthedialogandthenpressSetView.
Noticethatthememberontheleftsideoftheframeisnotvisible.Once
againthisisbecausethelefthandmemberisoutsideoftheclipping
distancesetfortherighthandview.
51
Exercise:TogglingClippingPlanesOnandOff
Inthisexerciseyouwilllearnhowtotogglethestateoftheclippingplanesusing
theFlipcommand.
ChangetotheleftsideviewF1_SIDE_L(clickChooseViewicon).
SelecttheF1_SIDE_LviewfromthedialogdisplayedandthenpressSet
View.Noticethatthememberslocatedontherightsideofthemodelare
notvisible.
ToggletheclippingplanesOFF(ProSteelV8iMenu>Zoom/Views>
Clipplane>Flip)orclickClipPlanesFlipicon.
Noticehowtheclippingplanesaredeactivatedandthemembersonthe
rightsideofthemodelarenowvisible.
RepeattheFlipcommandseveraltimesnotingthechangeintheviewof
themodel.
Exercise:ChangingClippingPlaneDistances
Inthisexerciseyouwilllearnhowtochangetheclipplanedistancesothateven
thoughtheclipplanesarestillON,theviewinthemodelwillchangetoshow
membersthatwereoriginallyoutsideoftheclippingplanes.
1
ChangetotheleftsideviewF1_SIDE_L(clickChooseViewicon).
SelecttheF1_SIDE_LviewfromthedialogdisplayedandthenpressSet
View.
Changetheclippingplanessothattheviewdisplaysthememberslocated
ontherightsideofthemodel(ProSteelV8iMenu>Zoom/Views>
Clipplane>Distance)orclickClipPlanesDistanceicon.
OnexecutingtheClipplanedistancecommand,the"CurrentClipping
PlaneDistances"dialogisinvoked.Enteravalueof2500fortheBack
Distanceandkeepfrontdistancesetto450andpressOK.Notethatthe
viewnowshowsthecolumninthemiddleofthemodel.
Note:YouwilllearnlaterhowtosettheclipplanesatthetimetheWorkframe
isgenerated.
52
Mar-12
ModuleReview
ModuleReview
Nowthatyouhavecompletedthismodule,let'smeasurewhatyouhavelearned.
Questions
Mar-12
HowdoIsetapredefinedISOView?
WhenIappliedapredefinedfrontview,whycan'tIseesomeofthe
members?
HowdoIsetanACSwithoutchangingthemodel'sview?
53
Module Review
Answers
1
HowdoIsetapredefinedISOView?
ClicktheIsometricOverviewicon
WhenIappliedapredefinedfrontview,whycan'tIseesomeofthe
members?
ClipPlaneshavebeenset,andtheClipplanestogglebuttonison.
HowdoIsetanACSwithoutchangingthemodel'sview?
ClicktheObjectACScenteredicon.
54
Mar-12
DrawingandEditingShapes
andWorkframes
ModuleOverview
Inthischapter,youwilllearnaboutProSteel'sHandleeditfunctionusedtoedit
andmanipulatesteelshapesandplatesandotherelements.
Therearethreelessonsinthischapter.Eachlessonbeginswithalistofobjectives
thatdefinetheinformationthatyouwilllearninthatlesson.Anumberof
Exercisesareprovidedineachlessonthataredesignedtoteachyouthetopics
listedintheObjectivessectionatthestartofeachlesson.
ModulePrerequisites
BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.
Previousexperiencewitha3DCADsystem,preferablyMicroStationV8i
Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended
ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:
Mar-12
ActivatethehandlesandinvoketheProSteelProperties(ProSteelProperties)
function
Changevariousshapepropertiessuchassize,typeandlength
Modifystructuralobjectssuchasworkframes
DrawSteelShapesinthemodel
Editsteelshapesandplates
55
Introductory Knowledge
IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeginthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.
Questions
1
WhatareEditHandles?
WhentheEditHandlesaren'tdisplayingwhenyouclickonanelement,
youjusthavetosettheViewattributeforthem.TrueorFalse?
56
Mar-12
IntroductoryKnowledge
Answers
1
WhatareEditHandles?
EditHandles(or"handles")areuseddynamicallymodifyormanipulate
elements.Theygenerallyappearascolouredsquaresonelementsthatcan
beadjusted.
WhentheEditHandlesaren'tdisplayingwhenyouclickonanelement,
youjusthavetosettheViewattributeforthem.TrueorFalse?
False.Iftheyaren'tdisplaying,youmustenabletheirdisplayonthe
ElementSelectionDialog.
Mar-12
57
Handle Editing
HandleEditing
Inthislesson,youwilluseMicroStationhandlestoeditsteelshapesinorderto
changesize,length,shape,typeanddisplayoptions.Youwillalsousehandlesto
editProSteelObjects.
Exercise:EditingaShape'sProperties
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoactivateacomponent'shandlesand
subsequentlydisplaytheShapePropertiesdialog.Thisdialogenablesyouto
modifythepropertiesthatdefineashape.
1
OpentheBASICS_01.DGNtrainingmodel(Filemenu>Open).
Browsetothetrainingfiledirectory.SelecttheBASICS_01.DGNfileand
pressOpen.
OpentheShapePropertiesdialog.
ZoominonthewideflangebeamlabelledUC203x203x46.Usingtheleft
mousebutton,picktheelementtoinvokeitsMicroStationhandles(which
shouldappearasbluesquares).
Withthehandlesoftheelementstillhighlighted,rightclickandselectPS
3DPropertiesfromthecontextmenu.
TheShapePropertiesdialogwilldisplayasshownbelow.
58
Mar-12
HandleEditing
Abriefdescriptionoftheshapepropertytabsettingsisprovidedbelow.
Mar-12
LayoutTab:containsthedisplayoptionsfortheshape.
ShapeTypeTab:containstheshapetype,class,andsizeoftheshape.
PositionTab:containsinformationrelatingtoshape'sinsertionpoint
andorientation.
AnalysisViewTab:AnalysisEffectiveCenterlinesareaparallelviewof
theCADmodelusedforstructuralanalysis.Thistabdefinesendpoints
oftheselinesandwhethertheyareautomaticoruserdefined.
DataTab:containspartslistdata.
ValuesTab:containsdimensionalandweightinformation.
CutsTab:containsinformationwithregardtocutsontheshape.
LoglinksTab:containsthesettingforlinksbetweenelements.
ConicalTab:containsdatapertainingtotheslopeofashapeplacedin
thedrawing.
AssignmentsTab:containsdatafordetailingthepartanddisplaying
thepartinrelationtothemodelandothershapesinthemodel.
Changetheshapesize:selecttheShapeTypetabontheShapeProperties
dialog.SelectUB203x133x25fromtheShapeSizedropdown.Noticethe
changeoftheshapeinthemodel.
ProSteeluses"nonmodal"dialogs.Thisisamajorbenefitwheneditinga
shapeorotherobjectasthechangesmadeinthedialogareimmediately
reflectedintheactualmodel.
59
Handle Editing
SwitchtotheLayouttabandlocatetheLayoutgroupboxintheupperleft
handcornerofthedialog.Movethedialogofftothesidesoyoucansee
theshapebeingedited.
CyclethroughthevariousdisplaymethodsintheLayoutDropDownand
notethechangesintheshapeandhowitchangesinthemodel.Return
thedisplaytotheEdgeInsidemode.
10 IntheOptionsgroupboxontherighthandsideoftheLayouttab,
experimentwiththedisplayoptionsoftheshapeandnotethechangesin
themodel.DisablethePartLabeloptionandnoticehowthepartname
associatedwiththeshapeisnolongerdisplayedinthemodel.
11 SwitchbacktotheShapeTypetabandselecttheShapeClassdropdown
andchangetheshapetoaBS_EQUALshape.IntheShapeSizedropdown
scrollthroughthelistandchangethesizetoanEA70x70x8angle.Notice
thechangeinthemodel.
60
Mar-12
HandleEditing
12 Finally,switchtotheValuestabandchangethevalueintheLengthfieldto
3250.Noticethechangeinlengthoftheshape.
13 Returnthevaluestotheiroriginalsettingsandclosethedialog.
Note: ModificationwithmoreprecisionandinrelationtootherProSteelobjectswill
becoveredinmoredepthintheCreatingaWorkframemoduleofthiscourse.
Mar-12
61
DrawingSteelShapesintheModel
ThissectionprovidesanoverviewoftheProSteelV8iShapesdialog.Youwillalso
learnhowtocreateasteelShapestemplatetominimizetheshapeselection.
Thereareseveralmethodsofinsertingshapesintoamodel,includinginsertion
viaalineinthemodel,picking2pointsinthemodel,andtheselectionofmultiple
lines.Youcanalsoinsertashapeinacrosssection,wheretheshapeisdrawnin
thenegativeZAxisfromthecurrentXYplane.
ThetwomostcommonmethodsofinsertingshapesaretheLinemethodandthe
2Pointmethod.Forourtrainingpurposeswefocusonthesemethods.
Exercise:CreatingatemplatefiletominimizetheShapetables
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreateatemplatefileoftheBSsteelshapes.
1
OpentheTRNMODEL.DGNfile.
Changetothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
YouwillbeginbyinsertingthecolumnsontheFR1workframe(click
Shapesicon).
Beforeyouplaceashapeyouneedtominimizethenumberofshapetypes
displayedwithinthedialog.Todothis,createatemplatefileandsavethis
sothatyoucanrecallitlater.
FromtheProSteelShapesdialog,presstheDisplaybutton.
AsyoucanseetheShapesCatalogshownbelowisdividedintothreemain
sections.
62
Mar-12
DrawingSteelShapesintheModel
Thelistofshapetablesshippedwiththeproductisshownonthefarleft
andthelistofavailableshapesforeachtableisdisplayedinthecenter.
TheCurrentShapeClassessectionontherightcontainsonlytheshapes
youwanttoseewhenyouinvoketheShapesInsertcommand.
Mar-12
AltertheCurrentShapeClassestoshowonlytheBSIBritishsteelshapes
andhavethemdisplayinMetricunits.Tobegin,pressthe<<buttonto
removealltheshapesfromtheCurrentShapeClassessection.
Next,disablealloftheoptionsinthecatalogsectionexceptfortheBSI
British.TheListofAvailableShapestotherightwillreflectthechange.
Nowpressthe>>buttontoaddalloftheshapesintheListofAvailable
ShapessectiontotheCurrentShapeClasseslist.
Fromthecentreofthedialog,selecttheMetricradiobutton.Thedialog
shouldnowappearasshownbelow.
63
10 Tosavethenewsettings,picktheTemplatebutton.WhentheProSteel
TemplateManagerdialogappears,createanewfoldernamed"TRAIN",
thenaddatemplatetothefoldernamed"Metric".Thedialogshould
appearasshownbelow.
11 PressEntertoreturntothepreviousdialogandpressOKtoreturntothe
Steelshapeinsertiondialog.
64
Mar-12
DrawingSteelShapesintheModel
Exercise:TheProSteelShapesDialog
1
OpentheBASICS_01.DGNfile.
OpentheProSteelV8iShapesdialog(ProSteelV8imenu>Shapesorclick
Shapesicon)andclickontheStraightShapestabifitisnotopen.
Theshapeselectiondialogcontainsthreetabsasshownintheabovefigure.
Togethertheycontroltheshapetypeandsizeaswellasitsorientation,length,
offset,materialandmethodofinsertion.TheoptionsprovidedintheStraight
Shapesdialogaredescribedinthefollowingtable.
Mar-12
Field
Description
ShapeType
Showstheshapetablesavailablefortheuseinthemodel.Theoptions
displayedinthisdependonwhichselection(Standardshapes,Usershapes,
CombinationshapesandRoofandWallshapes)iscurrentinthedropdown
aboveit
Resolution
Listtheavailableshapedisplayresolutions
ShapeClass
ListtheshapesizesavailableforthecurrentlyselectedShapeType.Additionally,it
controlsthedisplaydirectlytotherightofthesizelist.
ShapeSize
ListtheshapesizesavailableforthecurrentlyselectedShapeClass.Onceaspecificsize
memberisselectedanimageofthatshapewillappearindicatingthepossibleinsertion
pointswiththeselectedinsertionpointhighlightedinRED.Alsoindicatedbytheimage
isthecurrentrotationoftheshapeaboutitsaxisofinsertion.
65
Field
Description
Key
Displaysthecurrentshapethatwillbeinsertedifanyoneoftheinsertionmethodsat
thebottomofthedialogweretobeselected.Thisistheactualshapethatgetsinserted
andcanbedifferentthantheshapeshownintheShapeTypeandShapeSizesections
ofthedialog.
Material
Thematerialthatwillbeassignedtothismemberatthetimeofinsertion.
Layer
Providesadropdownlistofavailablelayersfortheelements.
PartFamily
Iffamilyclasseshavebeendefined,youcansetthemhere.Theselectionofthefamily
classcaninfluencethecolourofthepart.
DetailStyle
Ifdetailingstyleshavebeendefined,youcansetthemhere.
DisplayClass
Ifdisplayclasseshavebeendefined,youcansetthemhere.
AreaClass
Ifareaclasseshavebeendefined,youcansetthemhere.
Description
Ifgeneralpartsdescriptionshavebeendefined,youcansetthemhere.Theselectionof
thedescriptioncaninfluencethecolourandthelayer.
DeltaX
TheinsertionoffsetinXdirection.Thisfieldcanonlybeentered,ifyouhaveselected
theposition'Free'asinsertionpoint(thisisthebiggestdisplayedinsertionpoint).
DeltaY
TheinsertionoffsetinYdirection.Thisfieldcanonlybeentered,ifyouhaveselected
theposition'Free'asinsertionpoint(thisisthebiggestdisplayedinsertionpoint).
ItemNo.
Anitemnumbercanbeentereddirectlyhere.
Length
Specifythelengthoftheshape.Thisisimportantifyouwanttoinsertshapesinthe
crosssection.Inputsinthisfieldoverwritethelengthspecifiedbytheinsertionpoints.
Turn
Theshapewillberotatedaboutitsinsertionaxisthisvalue.
CreateGroup
Thisoptioncreatesagroupoutoftheshapeafterinsertion.
Clickthisbuttontoopenthefollowingdialogwhereallrelevantshapedataare
displayed.
Allinsertedshapesarestillconnectedwiththedialog,sothatsubsequent
modificationscanalsobetransferredtoalreadyinsertedshapes.
Ifyoudon'twantthisoption,youcaninterrupttheconnectionusingthisbutton.
However,theshapeisnotdeletedinthiscase.
SwapShape:Allinsertedshapes,whicharestillconnectedwiththedialog,aremirrored
alongtheirYaxis.Youwillobtainthisbyexchangingtheinsertionpoints.
MatchPropertiesofSelectedShapes
66
Mar-12
DrawingSteelShapesintheModel
Field
Description
Allowstheusertopickonelineandthensettheorientationoftheshapeaboutthat
line.
RotateShape:Theshapesareturnedeitherpositive(turnedleftinshapedirection)or
negative(turnedrightinshapedirection)aroundtheirinsertionpointusingtheentered
value.
Promptstheusertopickastartpointandendpointofashape.
Enablesyoutoinsertashapediagonallybetweentwopoints.
Promptstheusertopickastartpoint,anendpointandanaxisofrotationforthe
shape.
Allowsyoutoselectmultiplelines.Uponselectingthelinestheprogramwillplaceone
shapeoneachlinepicked.
Forthismethodofinsertion,theorientationoftheshapeisbasedonapointand
enteredanglevalue.Thelengthoftheshapeisassignedbasedinthevalueyouentered
intheLENGTHfieldofthedialog.Youwillbepromptedtopickapointfirstandthenwill
bepromptedtoenteranangle.
Youcanusethisoptionifyouhaveindicatedafixedshapelength.Youareprompted
foraninsertionpointandforanalignment.Thentheshapewillbeinsertedonthe
currentXYplaneoftheACSwiththecorrespondinglengthtotheback(intothedepth).
DisplaystheShapeCatalogdialogallowingyoutocustomizetheshapesthatare
displayedforselectionintheShapeClassessection.
DisplaystheShapeModificationdialogallowingyoutoaddbentorstraightsegments
toastraightoralreadybentshape.
Mar-12
67
Field
Description
Enablestheinsertionofsecondarybeamsbetweentwoexistingmainbeams.
Enablesyoutoinsertmultiplesecondaryshapesbetweenprimaryshapes
Enablesinsertionofbeamsatgridlines.WithAltselectionisviapolygon,withControl
LinesinallLevelsareused,otherwiseonlytheonesatthecurrentACSPlane.
Enablesinsertionofcolumnsatselectedpoints.
Exercise:InsertingSteelShapesintothemodel
Inthisexercise,youwilllearntheLineand2Pointmethodsofinsertingshapes
intothemodel.
1
OpentheProSteelV8iShapesdialog(clickShapesicon).
OpentheStraightShapestabandsettheparametersasshowninthe
figurebelow.Makesuretopickthetopcentreinsertionpointinthe
imageoftheshape.ThiswillinserttheshapeattheTOScentrepoint.
68
Mar-12
DrawingSteelShapesintheModel
Next,switchtotheOptionstabandsettheparametersasshownbelow.
Theoptionsprovidedinthisdialogaredescribedinthefollowingtable.
Mar-12
Name
Description
Height
SpecifyinsertionheightabovecurrentXYplane.
StartOffset
Specifyoffsetofshapefromstartpoint.
EndOffset
Specifyoffsetofshapefromendpoint.
Radius
Specifyarcradiusforbentshapescreatedfrompolyline.
69
Name
Description
Scale
Specifyscaleof2Dshapes.
HorizontalOffset
Thedistanceoftheshapesifashapeclasshasbeenselectedpermittinganoffsetof
severalshapesinhorizontaldirection.
VerticalOffset
Thedistanceoftheshapesifashapeclasshasbeenselectedpermittinganoffsetof
severalshapesinverticaldirection.
AngularInsertion Listofavailableinsertionpointsforangle.DeterminestheinsertionpointifInsertwith
LengthunderAngleisselected.
InsertinXYPlane EnableinsertionofshapescurrentXYplane.
Orientate
Enableorientationofshapesduringinsertionusingrightmouseclick
Dynamic
Enablesdynamicinsertionofshapes.
InsertRefPoints
Enablereferencepointcreationfrominsertionpoints.
Insertas2D
Shape
Enable2dShapecreation.
CloseDialog
Enabledialogclosureaftershapeinsertion.
KeepLength
Enablepersistenceoflengthfieldafterdialogclosure.
SecondaryBeam
ConnectAECLines:EnablesconnectionofAEClinesofbeamswithAEClinesofmain
elements.
Cope:Enableadditionofcopetosecondarybeams.Ifselected,enablesyoutoselecta
copetemplatefromthedropdownlistbelow.
OpenstheStructuralCopedialogallowingyoutoeditacopestyle.
SwitchbacktotheStraightShapestabandplacetheshapeusingtheLine
insertionmethod.(PresstheLinebuttonnearthebottomofthedialog).
Theprompt:PickthedesiredPoint<Line>isdisplayed.
Pickthebackleftverticalframelineatcolumnlocation2A.
Theprompt:ClickLeftHandMouseButtontoRotatetheShapeinPosition
orEntertoAcceptisdisplayed.
Clicktheleftmousebuttonuntiltheshaperotatesintotheposition
shownbelow.Whentheshapeisinthecorrectposition,clicktheRight
mousebuttontoendtheinsertionoftheshape,andthenclicktheRight
mousebuttonagaintoendthecommand.
WhentheStructuralShapesdialogdisplays,pressOKtoclosethedialog.
70
Mar-12
DrawingSteelShapesintheModel
InsertanothershapeusingtheLinemethod(clickShapesicon).
Definetheshapeasshownbelow.
10 SettheparametersintheOptionstabthesameasbeforeandinsertthe
shape(presstheLinebutton).
Theprompt:PicktheDesiredpoint<Line>willappear.
11 Pickthetoplinelocated2A.
Theprompt:ClickLeftHandMouseButtontoRotatetheShapeinPosition
orEntertoAcceptwillappear.
12 ClicktheLeftMouseButtontoRotatetheShapeinPositionorRight
MousetoAccept.
13 PresstheAcceptcurrentShapetopreventfurtherchangesbutton.This
willallowyoutoplaceadditionalshapesusingdifferentsettingsfromthis
dialogwithoutlosingthesettingsoftheshapejustplaced.
Mar-12
71
EditingSteelShapesandPlates
Inthissection,wearegoingtohaveacloselookatsomeofProSteelV8i
modificationtools.
Shapesandplatescanbelengthened,shortened,coped,notched,divided,
joined,anglecutandhaveBooleanoperationsperformedonthem.Thereare
severalmethodsavailabletomodifyshapesandplatesotherthanbyHandle
editing.ManipulationcommandsareavailableinthemainStructuralModify
ElementdialogthatisaccessedthroughtheManipulatemenuitem.ProSteelV8i
Manipulatedialog(ProSteelV8imenu>Manipulate)orclickModifyicon.
ThissectioncoverstheElementModificationdialog.
Exercise:TheElementModificationDialog
1
OpentheElementModificationdialogshownbelow(ProSteelV8imenu>
Manipulate)orclickModifyicon.
Note:Eachtimethatyouseethisicon
inadialog,youhavetheoption
todisplayaBitmap(Graphics).
However,settingtheGlobalDialogSettingstoExpertModewillnot
showBitmap(Graphics).
Thisdialogisdividedintosixfunctionaltabs.TheoptionsintheCommon
tabaredescribedinthefollowingtable.Inthenextexercise,youwill
executesomeofthesefunctionsontheshapesintheBASICS_01.DGN
model.
72
Mar-12
EditingSteelShapesandPlates
Extend/Trim(highlightedblock).Thefirsticonistocuttheshapeataline.
ThiscanbeaMicroStationlineaswellasanimaginarylinethatcanbe
createdonflybyenteringtheletter"P"whenpromptedtopicktheline
uponwhichtocut.WhenyouenteravalueintheDistancefieldinthe
maindialogtheshapewillbegappedfromthelinethisamount.
ToExtendtoaLine,insertashapeintothedrawinganddrawalineacross
itspathafewfeetaway.Selecttheicontoextend/trimtoline.Atthis
pointitisnecessarytoselecttheshapeandoncethatisdone,holddown
the[Alt]keyandselectthelinetheelementshouldbeextendedto.
ToTrimtoaLine,begininthesamemannerasabovebyplacingashapein
thedrawing,thistimehowevercreateacrossinglinethatintersectsthe
shape.Selecttheicontoextend/trimtoline.Totrimtoalinesimplyselect
theobjectonthesidethatshouldberemovedthenselectthelineitself.
Thesecondiconistocutorextendedatanothershape.Inorderforthe
cuttotakeplace,thecenterlineoftheobjecttobecutmustintersect
somepartoftheshapeuponwhichyouarecuttingbackto.Whenyou
enteravalueintheDistancefieldinthemaindialogtheshapewillbe
gappedfromthecuttingelementthisamount.
TheDistancetextboxletsyouenteranoffsettothecuttinglineorcutting
element.
CreatesStraightCut:turnonthischeckboxtocreateastraightcutata
lineorobject,nomatterhowthesearepositionedtothecutobject.
ToExtendtoObject:Extendingtoaobject/shapesisfairly
straightforward.Placetwoshapesinthedrawing;acolumn,andabeam
goingtowardsthecolumn'sflange.Leaveaspacebetweenthem.Select
theicontoextend/trimtoshape.Thenselecttheshapetobeextended
(beam)andthenselecttheshapetoextendto(column).Notethatthe
Mar-12
73
elementwillextendtothepointwhereitscenterlinetouchestheobjectit
isextendingto.
ToTrimtoObject:Forthisexamplerecreatethesamegeometrybetween
twoobject/shapesasabovebutthistimehavethebeamcrosspastthe
column.Cuttoshapeisdonebyfirstselectingtheshapethatistobecut
andthenchoosingtheshapeitwillcutagainst.Heretheshortersideis
alwaysremovedandasmentionedabove,theelementwillextendtothe
pointwhereitscenterlinetouchestheobjectitisextendingto.
Divide/Connect(highlightedblock).Thefirsticon,Divide,isusedtodivide
ashapeintotwoshapes.Thecuttinglinemaybeanylineorobject.Pick
theshapetobedividedandthenthedividinglineorpoint.Whenyou
haveenteredavalueintheDistancefieldinthemaindialogBOTHnew
endswillbeshortenedthisamount.
Distancetextfield:Distancebetweenelementsafterdivision.
SeparateonLevelcheckbox:Ifthisoptionhasbeenactivated,youare
askedforthreepoints,whichhavetoformaplane.Thepartsaredivided
alongthisplane.
ToDivide:Withdivideitispossibletotakeasingleshapeandbreakitinto
twocompletelyseparateelements.Todothis,placeashapeintothework
area.Nextchoosethedivideiconandselecttheshape.Oncetheshapeis
selecteditispossibletodivideiteitherbyselectingapoint(default)orby
selectingalinethatcrossestheshape.
Itisimportanttokeepinmindthatwhenselectingapointthatthe
divisionwillbemadefromthatpoint,perpendiculartotheshape.
74
Mar-12
EditingSteelShapesandPlates
ThesecondiconistheConnecticon.Thisfunctionallowstwoshapesof
thesametypetobejoinedasone.Theymustbeexactlyaligned.
Distancetextbox:Distancebetweenelementsafterdivision.
SeparateonLevelcheckbox:Ifthisoptionhasbeenactivated,youare
askedforthreepoints,whichhavetoformaplane.Thepartsaredivided
alongthisplane.
Notchicon:Usingthisfunction,youcaninsertsimplegeometricalshapes
ofoutletsandcountersunkpartsintoyourshapes.Youcancreatesquare,
wedgetype,andcircularshapesusingthedialogwhichdisplaysupon
selectingthisoption.
SquareNotch:Tousethisoptionsimplyselectthememberandthenthe
locationonthememberwherethenotchshouldbeplaced.
Oncethisisdone,filloutthevaluesforWidth,HeightandDepthand
selectthepositionofthenotchinaccordancewiththepointthatwas
selected.Ablue,yellowandredcrosshairwillindicatethepointthatwas
selected.
WedgeNotch:Wedgeworksthesamewaythat'Square'doesbutincludes
twonewoptions,'EdgeFrontEdgeBack'and'EdgeTopEdgeBottom'.
Thefirstoptioniswhethertheverticalflatsideshouldfacethe'front'or
'back'.Thisdeterminesthenotchesdirectioninrelationtothedirection
thatthememberisbeingdrawn.Forexampleifthememberisdrawnleft
torightthentheverticalflatsideforthe'front'isalwaystotheleftand
the'back'alwaystotheright.
Thesecondoptionis'top'or'bottom'edge.Thiswillplacethehorizontal
flatsidefacingwhicheverdirectionischosen.Againthisisrelatedtothe
waythememberhasbeendrawn.If,forexample,thebeamisplacedin
Mar-12
75
thedrawingupsidedown(rotated180degrees)the'edgebottom'would
placetheflatsideatthetopandthe'edgetop'wouldplacetheflatsideat
thebottom.
RadialNotch:TheradialnotchworksdifferentlythanSquareandWedge.
Ittakesintoaccounttheradius,length&angleofthecylinder.Italsohas
theoptiontousetheouterorinnerradius.
Position:Underthe'Position'tab,thenotchrotationcanbeadjusted
alonganyaxis.Herethereareoptionsforrotatingthenotchby+/90
degreesorifneededavaluecanbeenteredand+/Phicanbeusedto
rotatebythespecifiedamount.
Polycutssection:PressthePickbutton(firsticon),thenpicktheshapeto
becut.Next,pickthepointofthepolylinedefiningtheboundariesofthe
cut.TheComplete,OnlyUpperHalfandOnlyLowerHalfsettingsdecide
wheretoapplythecut.IfavalueisenteredintheGapfield,anoffsetfrom
thecutlinewillbemaintainedequaltothevalueenteredintheGapfield.
Polyline:PressthePolylinebutton(secondicon),thenpicktheshapeto
becut.Next,youpickthepolylinethatdefinestheboundariesofthecut.
InthiscasethepolylinemustbedrawnwithMicroStationandbedrawn
priortoinitiatingthepolycutcommand.TheComplete,OnlyUpperHalf
andOnlyLowerHalfsettingsdecidewheretoapplythecut.Ifavalueis
enteredintheGapfieldanoffsetfromthecutlinewillbemaintained
equaltothevalueenteredintheGapfield.
Subtract:Thisbuttonisusedtosubtractthevolumeofoneshapefrom
thevolumeofanother.PresstheSubtractbutton(thirdicon),thenpick
theshapetobecut,thentheshapetoactastheboundaryshape.The
Complete,OnlyUpperHalfandOnlyLowerHalfsettingsdecidewhereto
76
Mar-12
EditingSteelShapesandPlates
applythecut.IfavalueisenteredintheGapfieldanoffsetfromthecut
linewillbemaintainedequaltothevalueenteredintheGapfield.
2
AfterreviewingtheoptionsoftheElementModificationdialog,press
Canceltoclose.
Exercise:UsingtheModifyFunctionsonSteelShapesandPlates
Inthissection,youwillusetheoptionsinProSteelElementModificationdialogto
modifysteelshapesandplates.
1
OpentheElementModificationdialog(ProSteelV8imenu>Manipulate).
ClickontheShapetab.YouwillshortenshapeUC152x152x23by300.Type
300intheDefaultfieldintheShortensectionofthedialogasshown
below.
ThetextbelowprovidesdescriptionsoftheoptionavailableintheShapes
tab.
ShortenShapes:therearethreeiconsinthissection.
ByPick:Allowsyoutoshortenashapebypickingthedistance.Initiatethe
commandandbeginbypickingtheshapetobeshortened.Pickastarting
pointthenanendpointoftheshorteningandtheshapeisshortenedby
thisdistance.
ByDimension:Allowsyoutoshortenashapebyadistanceequaltoaset
value.Picktheshapethen,whenprompted,typeinavalueandtheshape
isshortenedbythisamount.
ByDefault:Shortenstheshapeadistanceequaltothevalueenteredin
theDefaultfield.TypeavalueintheDefaultfieldandinitiatethe
command.Picktheshapetobeshortenedneartheendyouwantreduced
Mar-12
77
andtheshapewillautomaticallybeshortenedthisamount.Ifyou
continuetopickthesameelementtheshapewillcontinuetobe
shortenedthedefaultvalue.
LengthenShapes:therearethreeiconsinthissection:
ByPick:SameastheShortenShapesByPickexcepttheshapeis
lengthenedbythedistancepicked.
ByDimension:SameastheShortenShapesByDimensionexceptthe
shapeislengthenedbythedimensionentered.
ByDefault:SameastheShortenShapeByDefaultexcepttheshapeis
lengthenedbythedefaultvalue.
Cope/Notch:thereisoneiconinthissection:
Cope:Copesoneshapewhereitmeetsanothershape.Theshapesmust
intersect.Oncethecommandisinitiatedpicktheshapetobecoped
followedbytheshapeuponwhichtocut.Afterpickingtheshapes,a
dialogdisplaysgivingyouadditionaloptionscontrollingtheactualcope
distancesandparameters.
MitreCuts:therearethreeiconsinthissection:
AngleBisect:Thisfunctionallowsformiteringtwoshapesthatareofthe
samesizeandtype.AdditionallyyoucandefineaGapbetweenthetwo
miteredshapesbyenteringavalueintheGapfield.
OutsideEdge:Thisfunctionallowsformiteringtwoshapesthatmaynot
bethesamesizeandtype.AdditionallyyoucandefineaGapbetweenthe
twomiteredshapesbyenteringavalueintheGapfield
Insertbend:Performsamiterandreplacesthebevelededgewithashape
sectionwitharadiusasspecifiedintheRadiusfield.
3
PresstheByDefaultbutton.
Theprompt:PickShapeatEndtobeShortenedisdisplayed.
PicktheUC152x152x23shapenearitsleftend.Noticethattheshape
shortens.PressOKtoclosethedialogandendthecommand.
OpentheElementModificationdialog(ProSteelV8imenu>Manipulate).
AnglemitrethetwoUC152x152x23shapesthatareangledadjacentto
eachother.IntheMitreCutssectionofthedialog,presstheAngleBisect
button.
Theprompt:SelectFirstShapeforAngleCutisdisplayed.
78
Mar-12
EditingSteelShapesandPlates
PickoneofthetwoUC152x152x23shapesthatareangledadjacentto
eachother.
Theprompt:SelectSecondShapeforAngleCutisdisplayed.
PicktheotherUC152x152x23shapeandnotethemitrethatisappliedto
thetwoshapes.
PressOKtoclosethedialog.
10 OpentheElementModificationdialog(ProSteelV8imenu>Manipulate).
11 Nowyouwillcutoneshapebackfromanother.PresstheAtObjectbutton
intheExtendTrimsectionofthedialog.
Theprompt:SelectShapetoCutorESCformoreShapestoCutis
displayed.
12 SelecttheUC152x152x23shapethatteesintotheflangeofthe
UC152x152x23shape.
Theprompt:SelectShapeonWhichtoCutisdisplayed.
13 PicktheintersectingUC152x152x23shape.Noticethecutbackthatis
appliedtothebeam.
Takeafewminutestofamiliarizeyourselfwiththeothermanipulation
functions.
Mar-12
79
Module Review
ModuleReview
Nowthatyouhavecompletedthismodule,let'smeasurewhatyouhavelearned.
Questions
1
WhatarethetwomostcommonwaystoPlaceShapesintotheDesign?
Whatfourwaysareusedtoshortenabeamorcolumn?
80
Mar-12
ModuleReview
Answers
1
WhatarethetwomostcommonwaystoPlaceShapesintotheDesign?
InsertShapeonaselectedline,orbytwopoints.
Mar-12
Whatfourwaysareusedtoshortenabeamorcolumn?
UseEditHandles
ChangetheLengthintheProSteelPropertiesoftheShape.
TrimtoaLine.
TrimtoanotherShape.
81
Module Review
82
Mar-12
CreatingaWorkframe
ModuleOverview
Inthischapter,youwilllearnhowtocreateProSteelV8iWorkframes,modify
them,andcreateaDisplayClassinwhichtoaddtheframes.
Therearefivelessonsinthischapter.Eachlessonbeginswithalistofobjectives
thatdefinetheinformationthatyouwilllearninthatlesson.Anumberof
exercisesareprovidedineachlesson.
ModulePrerequisites
BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.
Previousexperiencewith3DCADsystempreferablyMicroStationV8i
Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended
ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:
Mar-12
CreateasymmetricalandanonsymmetricalWorkframe
EdittheWorkframetochangeitspropertiesanddimensionalsettings
CreateandmanipulateDisplayClassesandAreaClasses
AssignourWorkframetotheDisplayClassesandAreaClasses
CycletheDisplayClassestocontroltheviewinthemodel.
83
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe
Introductory Knowledge
IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeingthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.
Questions
1
Creating a Workframe
HowdoyousetanAuxiliaryCoordinateSystembacktoaglobaloriginand
baserotation?
TypeGO=0,0,0intheKeyinDialog
TypeACTIVEORIGINCENTREintheKeyinDialogandDatapoint
ReprojecttheGlobalOriginbysettingaGeographicCoordinateSystem
RightmouseclickontheACSDialogandresettoGlobal
WhywouldyouneedtoresettheAuxiliaryCoordinateSystem?
84
Mar-12
IntroductoryKnowledge
Answers
1
HowdoyousetanAuxiliaryCoordinateSystembacktoaglobaloriginand
baserotation?
RightmouseclickontheACSdialogandresettoGlobal
WhywouldyouneedtoresettheAuxiliaryCoordinateSystem?
IftheorientationoftheACSisatanoddangle,theworkframewillnotsit
flat;rather,itwillgooffatanincorrectangle.
Mar-12
85
Creating a Workframe
CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings
WestronglyrecommendtheuseofWorkframesasoftenaspossible,even
thoughitispossibletomodelacompletestructurewithoutusingone.The
Workframeisa3Dobjectmadeupoflinesintheformofsquare/rectangle,
cylinder/coneorpyramid.Itprovidestheuserwiththefollowing:
Routinglinesforsteelplacement.
Automaticclippedviews,for2Ddrawinggenerationandeasierviewing.
AstructurecanbemodeledwithoneorseveralWorkframes.
Exercise:CreatingtheSymmetricalWorkframe
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreateandeditaworkframe.
1
CreateanewdrawingusingthetemplatecreatedinChapter2andsetthe
viewtoIsometricOverview1.
DisplaytheProSteelV8iWorkframedialogandplaceaworkframe
(ProSteelV8imenu>StructuralObjects>Workframe)orclickWorkframe
icon.
Theprompt:SelectOriginofWorkframeorEnterforACSoriginis
displayed.
RightclicktoaccepttheACSorigin.
Theprompt:SpecifyXAxisforWorkframeorEnterforACSXAxisis
displayed.
RightclicktoaccepttheACSXAxis.
TheProSteelV8iWorkframedialogdisplaysasshownbelow.
Creating a Workframe
Setthesizeandnumberofdivisionsasshowninthedialogbelow.
86
Mar-12
CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings
NextswitchtotheViewstabandsettheparametersasshownbelow.
NowsettheparametersintheTextXandTextYtabsasshownbelow.
Mar-12
87
Creating a Workframe
SwitchtotheOptionstabandsetthevaluesasshownbelow.
Creating a Workframe
Finally,switchtotheBlockstabandsetthevaluesasshownbelow,then
pressOKtocreatetheworkframe.
88
Mar-12
CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings
Note: AcellinMicroStationistheequivalentofaBlockinAutoCAD.
Exercise:ViewinganexistingWorkframe'ssettings
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoeditaworkframe'sdimensionalsettings.
1
SetthemodeltotheOverview1view(ClickIsometricOverviewIcon).
Zoomintothefrontleftcorneroftheworkframejustcreatedandpickthe
yellowcollaredAxisDescription.
OncetheMicroStationhandlesareactive,rightclicktoaccessthecontext
menu.
SelectthePS3DPropertiesoption.ThiswillopentheProSteelV8i
Workframedialog.Thisisthesamedialogusedtocreatetheworkframe.
Fromthisdialogyouareabletochangetheworkframe'slength,width,
height,numberofdivisions,gridsystem,gridsize,etc.
Mar-12
89
Creating a Workframe
Note: Oncesteelmembershavebeenplacedonaworkframeandtheworkframeis
modifiedtheshapesWILLNOTupdatetomatchthenewdimensionsofthe
workframe.
Leavetheworkframevaluesunchanged.PressOKtoreturntothemodel.
Ifthehandlesarestillactive,leftclicktwicetodeactivatethem.
ThedimensionalportionofaWorkframeiswhatisknownasa'Structural
Object'.Thisportionoftheworkframecontainsallofthedimensional
datanecessarytodefineitssizeandlocation.Inadditiontothe
dimensionaldatathereisspecificframedataassociatedwitheveryface
(top,left,right,front,backandallfacesinbetween)oftheworkframe.
Eachoneofthesefacesisindependentoftheothersandcanbemodified
separately.Theseindividualframesalsoconstitutetheframesections
thatareautomaticallyprocessedbythe2DDetailCenter.Inthenext
exerciseyouwillviewandmodifyoneoftheseframes.
Exercise:ViewingpropertiesofanExistingWorkframe
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoview/editaworkframe'sproperties.
1
WiththemodelintheOverview1view,windowintothefrontleftcorner
oftheworkframeyoucreated.
Now,pickonthetopmagentacollaredframe.OncetheMicroStation
handlesareactive,rightclicktoaccesstheContextmenu.
BrowsethemenuandselectthePS3DPropertiesoption.Thiswillopen
theWorkframePropertiesdialog.Eachtabwithinthedialogallowsyouto
view/modifyvariouspropertiesoftheworkframeasshownbelow.
Creating a Workframe
90
Mar-12
CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings
Fromwithinthisdialogyoucanchangethedisplayofthisworkframe.You
havetheabilitytochangethename,sizeandspacingoftheworkframe
axis.Youcanalsosettheclipplanedistancesonthefrontandback(or
aboveandbelow)oftheworkframe.YoucanturnontheAreaNameas
Mar-12
91
Creating a Workframe
wellasrenamethecompleteframe,settheCameralocationandview
locationetc.
4
Creating a Workframe
LeavetheWorkframePropertiesunchangedandpressOKtoclosethe
dialog.
92
Mar-12
CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings
Exercise:CreatingaNonSymmetricalWorkframe
InthisexerciseyouwillusetheAxisDistancemethodtocreatethenon
symmetricalworkframeFR2.WhenusingAxisdistancesyouwillassigneachaxis
(Length,Width,Height)aseriesofdistancestoformtheframe.
1
SetthemodeltotheOverview1view(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
Addanotherworkframe(clickWorkframeicon).
Theprompt:SpecifyoriginofworkframeorrightmousebuttonforACS
displays.
PicklowerbackleftcornerofworkframeFR1.
Theprompt:SpecifyXaxisofWorkframeorEnterACSXaxisdisplays.
ClicktheRightMousebutton.
ClickontheLayouttabandmakesuretheWorkframeLayoutissetto
Rectangular.MakesuretheoptionsintheDimensionsandDivisions
sectionarealldisabled.
SettheLength,Width,andHeightvaluesasshownbelow.
Note:BoththeWidthandHeighthavemultiplevaluestoproduce2bayswide
and2levelshigh.
Mar-12
SwitchtotheViewstabandmakesureallothersettingsaresetasshown
below.
93
Creating a Workframe
Next,switchtotheTextXandTextYtabsofthedialogandsettheaxis
descriptionvaluestomatchthefiguresbelow.
Creating a Workframe
94
Mar-12
CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings
Finally,settheparametersintheOptionstabasshownbelow.
10 Whenthesettingsareasshownabove,pressOKtoclosethedialog.
11 YouwillalsoneedtomodifytheaxisdisplaysettingsinthepreviousFR1
workframe.SelecttheyellowworkframeofFR1usingthelefthandmouse
button,thenrightclickandselectthePS3DPropertiesfromthemenu
list.SelecttheTextXtabselecttheindividualSettingButton.
Bydoubleclickingontheaxis1and2therewillbean"X"placedinthe
Invisiblecolumn.
Mar-12
95
Creating a Workframe
12 SelectOK.
13 TofinalizetheWorkframe,youwilladdadditionalconstructionlinesfor
anawningfromgrid3betweencolumnsBandC.Zoomintothecornerof
theworkframeatB3.
14 SetCurrentLeveltoPS_WORKFRAME.
15 SettheACStofrontview.
16 StarttheMicroStationLinecommand.
Theprompt:PickfirstpointIsdisplayed.
17 SelecttheintersectionpointofaxisB3level1
Theprompt:Specifynextpoint:Isdisplayed.
18 ChangeAccuDrawtoPolarandenter120fordistanceand10forangle,
thenenteradatapointtoaccept.
19 RepeatthestepsaboveforcolumnatC3.
Yourmodelshouldappearasbelow:
Creating a Workframe
96
Mar-12
CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings
Mar-12
97
Creating a Workframe
Creating and Manipulating Display Classes, Area Classes and Part Families
CreatingandManipulatingDisplayClasses,AreaClassesand
PartFamilies
Inthissection,youwilllearnwhatDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies
areandhowtocreatethem.Additionallyyouwilllearnhowtoassignstructural
elementsandobjectstothemtomakeviewingthemodeleasierinthecaseof
complexmodels.
DisplayClasses
DisplayClassesareaProSteelV8itoolusedtoseparateamodelintoobject
visibilityclasses.
TheDisplayClassescommandallowsyoutoorganiseobjects(Shapesand
StructuralObjects)fromdifferentMicroStationlevelsintovisibilitygroupsthat
areindependentfromthelevelstheyresidein.Contraryto"freezing"levelsin
MicroStation,whichturnsoffthedisplayofthecompletelevel(resultingin
numerouslevelstocontroldisplay),DisplayClassesallowsyoutoselectentire
groupsorjustafewobjectsandmakethemvisibleorhidden.Thiswillhelp
simplifytheviewofthemodeldisplayedonthescreen.
Note: EachelementcanexistonlyinoneDisplayClassatatime.Thismeansthatit
willberemovedfromoneclassifitisassignedtoanother.
Exercise:CreatingDisplayClassesandAssigningObjectstothem.
Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreatedisplayclasses.Someofthedisplay
classesyoucreatewillbeusedlaterinthemodellingprocess.
1
Creating a Workframe
OpentheProSteelV8iDisplayClassesdialog(ProSteelmenu>Display
Classes>Dialog)orclickDisplayClassesicon.
98
Mar-12
CreatingandManipulatingDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies
YouneedtoassignnamestoourDisplayClasses.Inordertoassignaname
doubleclickononeoftheemptylistentriesandenteranameintheinput
field.ThefirstDisplayClasswillbenamed***markedmembers***.
AssignnamestoDisplayClasses,***markedmembers***,Beams,
Columns,Struts,WindBeams,WallStiffeners,StairStringers,Joist,
Purlins,Girts,etc,asshownbelow.
Mar-12
99
Creating a Workframe
Creating and Manipulating Display Classes, Area Classes and Part Families
AreaClasses
InadditiontoDisplayClasses,ProSteelV8iincludesAreaClassfunctionalityto
organizeandcontrolthevisibilityofconstructionareas(workareas,construction
phases,builds,etc.).TheusercancreateAreaClasses,assignobjectstothose
classesandthencontrolthevisibilityoftheobjectsbyturningonorofftheArea
Classes.
Exercise:CreatingAreaClassesandAssigningObjectstothem
Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreateAreaClasses.SomeoftheArea
Classesyoucreatewillbeusedlaterinthemodellingprocess.
1
OpentheProSteelV8iAreaClassesdialog(ProSteelmenu>AreaClasses>
Dialog)orclickAreaClassesicon.
YouneedtoassignnamestoourAreaClasses.Inordertoassignaname
doubleclickononeoftheemptylistentriesandenteranameintheinput
field.ThefirstDisplayClasswillbenamedBEAM.
AssignnamestoAreaClasses,BEAM,COLUMN,JOIST,BRACING
VERTICAL,BRACINGGENERAL,etc,asshownbelow.
Creating a Workframe
100
Mar-12
CreatingandManipulatingDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies
PartFamilies
PartFamiliesareamechanismtoautomaticallyallocateprefixes,coloursand
DetailStylesduringthepositioningprocessbycategorizingdifferenttypesof
components(e.g.,columns,beams,gussetplates,etc.).2Dlinetypesandcolour
canalsobecontrolledthroughthePartFamilies.
PartFamiliesshouldbecreated,componentsassignedtotheseandthenthePart
Familyprefixshouldbeusedduringpositioning.
Note: EachcomponentcanbelongtoonlyonePartFamilyatatime.
Exercise:CreatingPartFamiliesandAssigningObjectstothem.
Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreatePartFamilies.Someofthedisplay
classesyoucreatewillbeusedlaterinthemodellingprocess.
1
Mar-12
OpentheProSteelV8iPartFamiliesdialog(ProSteelmenu>PartFamilies
>Dialog)orclickPartFamiliesicon.
101
Creating a Workframe
Creating and Manipulating Display Classes, Area Classes and Part Families
YouneedtoassignnamestoourPartFamilies.Inordertoassignaname
doubleclickononeoftheemptylistentriesandenteranameintheinput
field.Anewdialogwillappear,enterDescription,PosPrefixandColour.
AssignnamestoPartFamilies,BEAM,COLUMN,JOIST,BRACING
VERTICAL,BRACINGGENERAL,etc,asshownbelow.
Creating a Workframe
102
Mar-12
CreatingandManipulatingDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies
Mar-12
103
Creating a Workframe
North Direction
NorthDirection
TheBenchmarkisasymbol/markerthatcanbeinsertedintothe3Dmodelto
specify/controlthenorthdirectionforerectionpurpose.
Exercise:CreatingNorthDirection.
Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreateaNorthDirection.
1
Toinsertabenchmarkintothe3Dmodel,clicktheBenchmarkicononthe
ProSteelV8iUtilitiestoolbar,thenspecifyanorigin/pointandanorth
direction,thedialogshownbelowwillappear.
Creating a Workframe
104
Mar-12
NorthDirection
Mar-12
105
Creating a Workframe
North Direction
UserDefinedPartDescription
ProSteelV8iprovidesamechanismtoassignuserdefinablepart/shape
descriptionsthatcanbeusedduringthecreationandeditingofparts(e.g.,
specifyinglevel,colourandlinestylelinestyle),searchingandorganizingand
filteringthedisplayofpartsduring2Ddrawingproduction.
ToassignaDescriptiontoashape,selectashapeintheV8imodel,rightclickand
selectPS3DPropertiesfromthecontextmenu.TheShapePropertiesdialogwill
appear.
FromtheDescriptiondropdownintheAssignmenttab,selectanypredefined
description.
Creating a Workframe
106
Mar-12
NorthDirection
Thetextfile(..\LOCALISED\ENGLISH\DATA\PRO_ST3D.FDF)controlsthisdrop
downlist.Itcontainssomepredefineddescriptionsbutismodifiablebytheuser
withthehelpofatexteditorsuchasMicrosoftNotepad.
ThePRO_ST3D.FDFdatacontentisarrangedasfollows:
Index,description[,layername,layercolor,layerlinetype][,colornormal,linetype
normal,colourhidden,linetypehidden]
Where"normal"arevisiblelineson2Ddetailsand"hidden"arehiddenlineson
2Ddetails.
UserDefinedtemplates
Templatesallowuserstosaveallvaluesrelatedtoadialog(includingalltabs)toa
userdefinedtemplatenameandthenreusethevaluesbyloadingthetemplate.
Thisfunctionalitysavestimeandallowssettingstobesharedbetweenco
workersandstandardisedwithinprojects.
Eachtypeoffunctionhasadedicatedfiletowhichuserdefinedtemplatesare
saved.TemplatefilesaregroupedintotheVariafolderundertwoseparate
subfolders:MetricandImperial.
TemplatescanbecreatedthroughmostProSteelV8idialogs.
Mar-12
107
Creating a Workframe
North Direction
Tocreateortoload/importatemplateclickonTemplate
TemplateManagerdialogwillappear.
.TheProSteelV8i
Tocreateanewtemplateinanewfolder,dothefollowing:
ClickonNewFolder
.Anewfolderisaddedwiththename"NewFolder".
Typeanewnameforthefolder(e.g.,."FirstFolder").
Clickonceoutsidethenamefield,thenclickonSaveTemplateAs.
Anew
templateisaddedwiththename"Template".Typeanewnameforthe
template(eg,"FirstTemplate").Thissavesthefields/settingsinthedialogto
thecorrespondingtemplatelistedabove.
Toloadatemplate,clickonTemplate.TheProSteelV8iTemplateManagerdialog
willappear.SelectatemplatefromthelistoftemplatesandclickonLoad
Template
.
Thiswillpopulateallfields/settingsinthedialogfromthetemplate.
Toimportatemplate,clickonTemplate.TheProSteelV8iTemplateManager
andthefilebrowserwillappear.Selectan
dialogwillappear.ClickonImport
existingtemplateandclickonOpen.
TheexistingtemplatewillbeloadedintotheProSteelV8iTemplateManager
dialog.
Creating a Workframe
108
Mar-12
ModuleReview
ModuleReview
Nowthatyouhavecompletedthismodule,let'smeasurewhatyouhavelearned.
Questions
Mar-12
WhatistheadvantageofusingaWorkframe?
WhydoweuseaPartDescription?
WhatdoesaProSteeltemplatesave?
Whatistheprocesstocreateatemplate?
109
Creating a Workframe
Module Review
Answers
1
WhatistheadvantageofusingaWorkframe?
TheworkframecanmaketheplacingofSteeldirectlyontothelines
easier.Ifsettodoso,itcanalsoautomaticallycreateviewsthatyoucan
rotatetowhichhavefrontandbackclippingplanesalreadydefined.
WhydoweuseaPartDescription?
ThemainuseofPartDescriptionsistoenablethesettingofaPosition
Prefixforelements.
WhatdoesaProSteeltemplatesave?
AllofthesettingsonaProSteelDialog.
Whatistheprocesstocreateatemplate?
ClicktheTemplatebutton,createafolder,thencreatethetemplate.
Creating a Workframe
110
Mar-12
InsertingandManipulating
Shapes
ModuleOverview
Inthischapter,youwilllearnhowtoinsertsteelintoaWorkframeusingtheLine
and2Pointmethods.Afterinsertionyouwilleditthesteelfurthersoyoucan
detailthejointsinlaterchapters.
ModulePrerequisites
BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.
Previousexperiencewith3DCADsystempreferablyMicroStationV8i
Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended
ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:
Mar-12
InsertsteelShapesonaworkframe
AssignmemberstoaDisplayClass
Insertshapesinamodelusingthe2Pointmethod
111
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Introductory Knowledge
IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeginthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.
Questions
1
HowdoyourotatethemodeltoastandardProSteelIsometricview?
112
Mar-12
IntroductoryKnowledge
Answers
1
HowdoyourotatethemodeltoastandardProSteelIsometricview?
OntheProSteelZoom/Viewsmenu,choosetheappropriateIsometric
Overviewfromthefivepredefinedoptions.
Mar-12
113
InsertingSteelShapesUsingtheLine
InthissectionyouwillcreateaSteelShapestemplatetominimizetheshape
selection.ThenyouwilllearnhowtoinsertsteelShapesonaworkframe.
Exercise:InsertingSteelShapesUsingtheLineMethod
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoinsertsteelshapesonourworkframeusing
theLinemethod.
1
FromwithintheProSteelShapesdialog,settheShapeClasstoBSUBand
theShapeSizetoUB305x165x46.Settheinsertionpointtothe"centreof
steel"bypickingthenodeonthecentreoftheshapeimage.
ClickontheOptionstabandmakesuretheOrientateafterinsertion
optionisenabled.
PresstheInsertshapeonSelectedLinebutton.
Theprompt:PickthedesiredPoint<Line>displays.
SelecttheverticallineoftheworkframelocatedatgridcoordinateA1in
theworkframeFR1.
Theprompt:Clicklefthandmousebuttontorotatetheshapeinposition
orentertoacceptdisplays.
Clicktheleftmousebuttontoturntheshapeinthedirectionshown
below.
114
Mar-12
InsertingSteelShapesUsingtheLine
Whentheshapeisorientatedcorrectly,rightclicktwicetoendthe
commandandreturntothedialog.
PresstheOKbuttontoclosetheProSteelShapesdialog.
Repeatthiscommandandinsertthesametypeandsizeshape
(UB305x165x46)atgridlineA2.Atallremainingverticalgridlines,insert
UB305x165x46shapes.
Hint:WhenselectingtheverticalgridlinesinFrameFR2,besuretopickthe
verticalgridlinesnearthetopoftheframesoasnottoselecttheFR1
gridlines.
9
Mar-12
Next,returntotheProSteelShapesdialog.KeeptheShapeClassasBSUB,
andsetthesizetoUB533x210x101.UsingtheLinemethod,insertand
orientthebeamsonthehorizontallinesasshowninthefollowingfigure.
Makesurethatthebeamsareinsertedusingthetopcenter"TOS"
insertionpoint.
115
Yourmodelshouldappearasshownbelow.
Exercise:ModifyingSteelMemberswiththeDivideCommand
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtodivideasteelshapebydividingitinto
multipleshapesatcolumnintersections.
Nowthatyouhavesomeelementsinsertedinyourmodelyouwillneedtodivide
someofthesewheretheyintersectacolumn.Todothisyouwillusethe
ManipulateandDividecommands.
116
Mar-12
InsertingSteelShapesUsingtheLine
OpentheElementModificationdialog(clickModifyicon).
PresstheDividebuttonintheCommontab.
Whenpromptedtoselecttheshapestobedivided,choosethe
UB533x210x101beamlocatedbetweencoordinatesB1toB3.Rightclick
toaccepttheselections.
Whenpromptedtopickthedividingpointorline,orwhenpromptedto
pickasnappoint,choosethecolumnlocatedatcoordinateB2.
Thesnapwilllocateapointonthecentroidaxistouseasthedividing
point.
Mar-12
PressOKtocompletethecommand.
RepeatthesameprocessfortheUB533x210x101beamcoordinatesC1to
C3.
ZoomintooneoftheUB533x210x101shapesattheintersectionwiththe
columnsandnotethattheelementisnowdividedintotwopieces.
117
AssigningSteelMemberstoaDisplayClass
Exercise:AssigningShapestoaDisplayClassUsingtheDisplayClassDialog
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoplaceshapesintoadisplayclassusingthe
DisplayClassdialogAssignfeature.
1
OpentheDisplayClassesdialog(ProSteelmenu>DisplayClasses>
Dialog)orclickDisplayClassesicon.
Note:IftherearenoAssignedClassesinthedialog,youcaneditthecontent
ofthefieldClassNamebydoubleclickingit.
2
SelecttheColumnsClasstomakeitactive,thenpresstheAssignbutton.
Theprompt:SelectobjectsyouwishtoaddtotheDisplayClassdisplays.
Pickallofthecolumnswithinthemodelandthenrightclicktoreturnto
theDisplayClassesdialog.
TurnoffColumnsClasstoremovethemfromthedisplay.Thismakesit
easiertobeabletoselecttheotheritems.
SelecttheBeamsClasstomakeitactivethenpresstheAssignbutton.
Theprompt:SelectobjectsyouwishtoaddtotheDisplayClassdisplays.
ChooseallbeamsexcepttwobeamslocatedbetweenC1,C2,andC3.
RightclicktoreturntotheDisplayClassesdialog.
PressOKintheDisplayClassdialogtoreturntothemodel.
Exercise:AssigningShapestoaDisplayClassUsingEditing
1
SelectthetwoUB533x210x101beamslocatedalongC1andC2to
highlightthem.RightclicktoaccesstheProSteelProperties.
WhentheShapePropertiesdialogappears,switchtotheAssignments
tab.
NexttotheDisplayClasspickbox,selectthedropdownarrowand,from
thelistofavailabledisplayclasses,selecttheBeamsdisplayclass.Select
OKtoreturntothemodel.
Addtheremainingshapestotherespectivedisplayclassinthesame
manner(i.e.beamslocatedalongC2andC3).
118
Mar-12
InsertingSteelShapesUsingthe2PointMethod
InsertingSteelShapesUsingthe2PointMethod
Theobjectiveofthislessonisasfollows:
Learnhowtoinsertshapesinamodelusingthe2Pointmethod.
Exercise:InsertingSteelshapesUsingthe2PointMethod
1
OpentheProSteelShapesdialog(clickShapesicon).
FromwithintheStructuralShapesdialog,settheShapeTypetobeBSUB
andtheShapeSizetoUB406x140x39.
Settheinsertionpointtothe"topcenterofsteel"bypickingthenodeon
thecenterofthetopflangeontheshapeimage.
ClickontheOptionstabtomakesuretheOrientateafterinsertionoption
isenabled.
Selectthe2Pointmethodofinsertionandzoominontheintersectionof
thecolumnatcoordinateB2andtheexistingbeams.
Whenpromptedtoselecttheinsertionpointoftheshape,choosethe
midpointoftheupperflangeoftheintersectingbeam(runningalongAxis
B)atB2Level2.
Forthesecondendinsertionpoint,zoomtothecolumnatcoordinateC2
choosethemidpointoftheupperflangeoftheintersectingbeam
(runningalongAxisC).
Rightclicktoaccepttherotationoftheshape.
Rightclickagaintoreturntothedialog,thenpressOKtoendthe
command.
Yourmodelshouldnowappearasinthediagrambelow.
Mar-12
119
Exercise:InsertingRemainingSteelshapes
1
Addtheawningbeams,suchasBSUB152x152x37,fromcolumnsB3and
C3,usingthepreviouslydrawnconstructionlines.
Assignthesebeamstotheirrespectivedisplayclasses.
Saveyourmodel.
Yourmodelshouldnowappearasshownbelow.
120
Mar-12
InsertingSteelShapesUsingthe2PointMethod
Mar-12
121
Module Review
ModuleReview
Nowthatyouhavecompletedthismodule,let'smeasurewhatyouhavelearned.
Questions
1
WhattwomethodscanbeusedtoassignaDisplayClasstoasteel
member?
Answers
1
WhattwomethodscanbeusedtoassignaDisplayClasstoasteel
member?
YoucaneithersetitontheDisplayClassdialog,orsetitontheShape
Properties>Assignmentstab.
122
Mar-12
CreatingConnectionsBetween
Elements
ModuleOverview
Thismoduledescribeshowtocreateconnectionsbetweenelements.Youwill
learnhowtocreateanduseEndPlateconnections.YouwillalsousetheBolting
commandtoaddboltstoEndPlateconnections.
ModulePrerequisites
BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.
Previousexperiencewith3DCADsystempreferablyMicroStationV8i
Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended
ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:
Mar-12
CreateanEndPlateconnection
AddadditionaldesignfeaturestoanEndPlateconnection
UseeditingtomodifyanexistingEndPlateconnection
Manuallymodifyaconnectionandadd"common"boltstotwobacktoback
EndPlateconnections
123
Introductory Knowledge
IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeingthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.
Questions
1
Howdoyouspinyourviewtothetopviewofaparticularbeam?
HowdoyouspinyourviewtotheFrontviewofaparticularWorkframe?
124
Mar-12
IntroductoryKnowledge
Answers
1
Howdoyouspinyourviewtothetopviewofaparticularbeam?
OntheProSteelViewsmenuchoosetheappropriateIsometricRotation
fromthefivepredefinedoptionsOutline1toOutline5
HowdoyouspinyourviewtotheFrontviewofaparticularWorkframe?
OntheProSteelViewsmenuchoosetheappropriateIsometricRotation
fromthefivepredefinedoptionsOutline1toOutline5.
Mar-12
125
CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection
Exercise:CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreateabasicEndPlateconnection.
1
Ifnotalreadyloaded,opentheTRNMODEL.DGNdrawingfile.
Zoomtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
Youwillbeginbyzoomingintothejointbetweenthecolumn
UB305x165x46andBeamsUB533x210x101atcoordinateA1.
Placeanendplate(ProSteelMenu>Connections>EndPlates)orclick
Endplatesicon.
Theprompt:SelecttheShapetoConnectisdisplayed.
PicktheUB533x210x101memberrunningalongAxisA.
Theprompt:Selectsupportshapeor<RETURN>fornosupportshapeis
displayed.
Selectthecolumnthatthebeamistobeconnectedto.TheProSteel
Endplatesdialogwilldisplay.Settheparametersasshownbelowinthe
Layouttab:
Layout
SettheparametersintheHolestabasshownbelow:
126
Mar-12
CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection
HoleDimensionsfromtopofendplate
SettheparametersintheConnecttab,asshownbelow:
Connect
SettheparametersintheGrouptab,asshownbelow:
Group
Mar-12
127
10 SettheparametersintheAssignmenttab,asshownbelow,thenclickthe
greencheckmarktoplacetheendplate.
Assignment
11 Repeatthesameprocedureandplacethesameendplateontheopposite
endoftheUB533x210x101beam.
AdescriptionofthefieldswithinthedifferenttabsoftheProSteelEndplates
dialogisprovidedinthefollowingtables.
Name
Description
LayoutTabFieldsandDescriptions
LayoutofPlate
Thisoptionliststhefollowingconnectiontypestochoosefrom:
Automatic:Theprogrammakesthedistinctionbetweenaspliced/buttornormalplate
connection.Anangleofapprox.45isassumedtobethecriticalangle.
Splice:Theconnectionisalwaysaspliceconnection.
Normal:Theconnectionisalwaysanormalplateconnection.
Flange:Theconnectionhasaplateweldedtoitsflanges.
128
Mar-12
CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection
Name
Description
PlateDimensions
Specifythebasicdimensionsoftheconnectingplate.
Width:meansthewidthoftheplate(incaseofIshapes:paralleltotheshapeflange).
Thickness:meansthethicknessoftheplate.
Length:meansafixedlengthoftheplateindependentoftheshapeheight.Enteringthe
value0forthelength,youcanentertheplatelengthvariablyintheOffsetTop/Offset
fieldsasdistancefromtheupperandloweredgeoftheselectedshape.
Gap:specifiesthatanindicatedspaceisleftbetweenthesupportingshapeandthe
plate.Thisallowsyoutoconsiderfinishingtolerances.
DoublePlate:meansthattwoconnectingplatesofthesamesizearecreated.
AsPolyplate
Selectifplatesarecreatedusingaflatsteelorpolyplates
Rotate
Connection
Rotatesconnectionupsidedown.
PlatesEqual
WhentheDoublePlatesoptionisenabled,thisforcesbothplatestobeidenticalin
form.
Pressthisbuttontoretrievethedimensionoftheplatefromashape.
Pressthisbuttontosetthedimensionsofthesecondplatetothoseofthefirstplate.
PlateOffset
Horizontal:meansthecompleteplateconnectionisshiftedparalleltotheflangeofthe
connectingshape.
Vertical:meansthecompleteplateconnectionisshiftedparalleltothewebofthe
connectingshape.
HolesTabFieldsandDescriptions
WithoutHoles
Mar-12
Theconnectingplateisenteredwithoutdrillholesifthisfieldisselected.
129
Name
Description
Vertical
Thisallowsyoutodeterminethenumberofverticaldrillholesintheplate.
Asymmetrical:Ifthisfieldischecked,youcandeterminethedistancesoftheholes.
Otherwise,asymmetricaldistributionisdeterminedaccordingtothedefaults.
Number:Youdeterminethenumberofdrillholesinverticaldirection.Youcanselect
between1and10drillholes.
(VerticalHolePattern):Thedrillholespacinginaverticaldirection(height)is
determined.Dependingontheentry,thevalueshavedifferentmeanings.Examplesare
givenattheendofthecommanddescription.
Youcanenterthedistanceoftheupperrowofholesfromtheplate'supperedgeinthe
Upsidefield.Ifthisvalueis0,andthevalueintheboxDownsideisalso0,theonlyentry
thatwillbeusedisintheMiddlefield.
Youcanenterthedistanceofthefirstandsecondrowofholesfromtheupperand
lowerplateedgeintheMiddlefield.Theholeswillbedistributeduniformlybetween
thetwoouterholesifthisvalueis0.Theotherrowsofholeswillbearrangedinthe
samemannerifthenumberisgreaterthan4.
Youcanenterthedistanceofthelowestrowofholesfromtheplate'sloweredgeinthe
boxDownside.OnlytheentryintheMiddleboxwillbeusedifthevalueinthe
DownsideandUpsidefieldis0.Youcanenterasimultaneousshiftingofallrowsof
holeswithrespecttotheplateupperedgeintheOffsetfield.Shiftingwillbecarriedout
withrespecttotheplateloweredgewhenenteringnegativevalues.Ifyouhave
selectedtheAsymmetricaloption,thestructureoftheholepatterninputchangesand
alistwithaninputfieldappears.Dependingonthenumberofholes,youcan
determineeachdistanceindividuallybyclickingthepositioninthelistandbyspecifying
thedistanceintheinputfield.Additionally,youcandeterminewhetherthedistribution
startsfromupperorlowerplateedge,dependingonthecheckedfieldupperedgeor
loweredge.
Horizontal
Thisallowsyoutodeterminethenumberofhorizontaldrillholesintheplate.
Number:Youdeterminethenumberofdrillholesinhorizontaldirection(width)inthe
list.Youcanselect1,2,or4drillholes.Thus,1to40holepatternscanbecreated.
(HorizontalHolePattern):Thedrillholespacinginahorizontaldirection(width)is
definedhere.Examplesaregivenattheendofthecommanddescription.Thedistance
betweentheouterleftrowofholesandthecentralleftrowofholes,ifthenumberof
rowsis4,isenteredintheLeftfield.Thedistancebetweenthetwoinnerrowsofholes
isenteredintheMiddlefield.Therowsofholesaregenerallyarrangedcentrally,unless
theyareoffsetbyanentryintheOffsetfield.Thedistancebetweentheouterrightrow
ofholesandthecentralrightrowofholes,ifthenumberofrowsis4,isenteredinthe
Rightfield.Simultaneousshiftingofallrowsofholeswithrespecttotherightplate
edgeisenteredintheOffsetfield.Whenenteringnegativevalues,shiftingwillbe
carriedoutwithrespecttotheleftplateedge.
Measuredfrom
IftheAsymmetricaloptionisenabled,thisprovidesalistofoptionstodetermine
wheretheholeoffsetsaremeasured.TheavailableoptionsareUpperEdgePlate,
UpperEdgeShape,andLowerEdgeShape.
130
Mar-12
CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection
Name
Description
ConnectTabFieldsandDescriptions
BoltSettings
TheBoltStyleallowsyoutoselectthetypeofbolts(e.g.,DIN558)tobeusedforthe
connection.TheEditStylebuttonnexttothisfielddisplaysadialogallowingyouto
createnewBoltstylesandeditexistingones.
YoucanentertheboltdiameterfortheconnectionintheDiafieldandtherequired
holediameteroftheboltedconnection,inmostcases+2mmintheWorkloosefield.
WeldSettings
TheWeldStyleallowsyoutoselectthetypeofweldtobeusedfortheconnection.The
EditStylebuttonnexttothisfielddisplaysadialogallowingyoutocreatenewweld
stylesandeditexistingones.
YoucanentertheweldingseamthicknessesbyenablingtheWeldFlangeSideWeld
WebSideoptionsandinenteringthethicknessinthecorrespondingfields.Welding
markscanbesubsequentlyassignedtotheweldingseams.
GroupTab
GroupandCope
IftheCreateGroupoptionisenabled,theplateandtheshapetobeconnectedare
arrangedtoformagroupinthisfield.Theplateisallocatedtoanothergroup,ifthe
shapeisalreadypartofthatgroup.Thesameappliestothesupportingshapeandthe
associatedstiffeners.
TheboltsorweldsfortheshapetobeconnectedarealsoassignedtothegroupinWith
BoltsorWithWeldsfields.
SafetyCopes
TopLeft:Leavesagapintheangleintheupperleftside.
TopRight:Leavesagapintheangleintheupperrightside.
BottomLeft:Leavesagapintheangleinthebottomleftside.
BottomRight:Leavesagapintheangleinthebottomrightside.
Exercise:CreatinganEndPlateConnectionwithanInherentGussetPlate
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreateanEndPlateconnectionwitha
gussetplateonthelowersurfaceofthebeam.
1
Toplaceaconnectionplate,first,zoomtotheintersectionofthethree
UB533x210x101beamswiththeUB356x171x51columnlocatedat
coordinateB1.
Placeanendplate(clickEndplateicon).
Theprompt:SelecttheShapetoConnectisdisplayed.
PicktheUB533x210x101memberrunningalongAxisB.
Theprompt:Selectsupportshapeor<RETURN>fornosupportshapeis
displayed.
Mar-12
131
PickthecolumntodisplaytheProSteelEndplatesdialogshownbelow.
SettheparametersasshownbelowandthenpressOK.
132
Mar-12
CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection
Clickthecheckmark.
Repeatthesestepstoplaceanotherendplatewithahaunchontheother
endofthesamebeam.
SetyourmodeltotheFR2_FRONTview.Itshouldappearasshownbelow:
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldswithintheBottomTrain
(Bt.Train)tab:
Name
Description
SelectHaunch
Specifythepositionofthehaunchaswellasanyadditionalstiffeners.
IftheTopHaunchfieldischecked,thehaunchiscreatedonthetopsideoftheshapeto
beconnected.
IftheBottomHaunchfieldischecked,thehaunchiscreatedonthebottomsideofthe
shapetobeconnected.
CopedShape
Createsthebottomtrainfromacopedshape
RectangularPlate Createsarectangularwebplate.
Mar-12
Normalto
Column
Cutsthewebplateparalleltothesupportingshape.OnlyavailablewhentheCoped
Shapeoptionisenabled.
AsPolyplate
CreatestheflangeofthebottomtrainasPolyplate.
Stiffenerin
SupportShape
IftheSupportShapefieldischecked,stiffenersareaddedtothesupportshape.These
stiffenersarecreatedinadditiontothosecreatedtogetherwiththeconnection.
133
Name
Description
Stiffenerin
ConnectShape
IftheConnectionShapefieldischecked,additionalstiffenersareaddedtothe
connectionshape.
ShapeSize
Specifythehaunchplates(plates).
IftheCopedShapefieldischecked,thehaunchisnotcreatedfromindividualplatesbut
fromonecroppedshape.Theshapesizecorrespondswiththeconnectionshape.All
othershapesizefieldsaretheninsignificant.
FlangeWidthisthewidthofthehaunchflangeifthehaunchisdesignedfromplates.
FlangeThicknessisthethicknessofthehaunchflangeifthehaunchisdesignedfrom
plates.
WebThicknessisthethicknessofthehaunchwebplateifthehaunchisdesignedfrom
plates.
Dimensions
Specifiestheexteriorhaunchdimensions.Abitmapillustratingthedimensionsis
availablebypressingtheHideGraphicsbuttonatthebottomofthedialog.Different
illustrationswilldisplaydependingonthetypeofshapesizeyouselect.Thedimension
numberswillcorrespondwiththefieldnumbersinthedialog.
HaunchLength:Setsthelengthofthebottomtrain.
CutWidth:Setsthecutheightintheconnectingshape.
TopHeight:Setsthetopoftheheightofthewebplate.
FlangeWidth:Setsthewidthoftheflangeofthebottomtrain.
FlangeThickness:Setsthethicknessoftheflangeofthebottomtrain.
PlateThickness:Setsthewebplatethickness.
FacetSize:Setsthefacetsonthewebplateontheinneredges.
FacetHorizontal:Setsthehorizontalfacetontheouteredgeofthewebplate.Only
availablewhentheRectangularPlateoptionisenabled.
FacetVertical:Setstheverticalfacetontheouteredgeofthewebplate.Onlyavailable
whentheRectangularPlateoptionisenabled.
Supp.PlateWidth:Setsthewidthofthesupportingplateunderneaththecopedshape.
Supp.Plate:EnablestheInputofthestrengthplateunderneaththecopedshape.
Supp.PlateThickness:Setsthethicknessofthesupportingshapeunderneaththe
copedshape.
Supp.ShapeasPoly:Createsasupportingplateaspolyplate.
Exercise:CreatinganEndPlateConnectionwithTwoInherentGussetPlates
134
Mar-12
CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreateanEndPlateconnectionwitha
gussetplateontheupperandlowersurfaceofthebeam.
1
ReturntoanOverview1view,thenzoomtotheintersectionofthethree
UB533x210x101beamswiththeUB356x171x51columnlocatedat
coordinateB2.
Placeanendplate(clickEndplateicon).
Theprompt:SelecttheShapetoConnectisdisplayed.
PicktheUB533x210x101memberrunningalongAxisB.
Theprompt:Selectsupportshapeor<RETURN>fornosupportshapeis
displayed.
PickthecolumntodisplaytheProSteelEndplatesdialogshownbelow.Set
theparametersasshownbelow.Whenfinished,pressOKtoplacethe
plates.
Mar-12
135
AftersettingtheparametersintheBt.TraintabfortheTopHaunch,
enabletheBottomHaunchinputthesamevaluesastheTopHaunch.This
willinserthaunchesaboveandbelowtheUB533x210x101beam.
Repeattheprocedureandplaceanotherendplatewithgussetplateson
theotherendofthesamebeam.Yourmodelshouldappearasshown
below.(FR2_FRONTview)
Exercise:CreatingEndPlateConnectionsattheRemainingIntersections
Inthisexercise,youwillfinishbuildingEndplateconnectionsbetweenbeamsand
columns.
1
AttheintersectionofallUB533x210x101beamswiththecolumnWEBS,
createanEndPlateconnection(clickEndplateicon)withthefollowing
parameters.
136
Mar-12
CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection
Mar-12
Aftersettingtheparametersabove,switchtotheGrouptabandenable
theCreateGroupandWithBoltsoptions.Theotherparametersinthis
dialogshouldremainunchanged.
AttheIntersectionoftheUB406x178x60(locatedintheTOPelevationof
workframeFR2)withthecolumnWEBScreateEndPlateconnections(click
Endplateicon)withthefollowingparameters:
137
Theremainingsettingsfortheseendplateswillremainunchanged,so
aftersettingtheLayoutparametersasshown,pressOKtoplacethe
endplate.
138
Mar-12
ModifyingConnectionsUsingEditing
ModifyingConnectionsUsingEditing
Theobjectivesofthislessonareasfollows:
LearnhowtouseeditingtomodifyanexistingEndPlateconnection.
Manuallymodifyaconnectionandadd"common"boltstotwobacktoback
EndPlateconnections.
IntroducetheBOLTINGcommand.
Exercise:ModifyinganExistingEndPlateConnection
1
Zoomtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
ZoomintothejointbetweenthecolumnUB305x165x46andbeams
UB533x210x101atcoordinateA1.
PicktheUB533x210x101beamrunningalongAxisAtohighlightit.
RightclickandselectPS3DProperties.
FromtheShapePropertiesdialog,selecttheLogLinkstab.
SearchtheLinkuntilyoufindtheEndPlatelocatedatthisintersection.
Thiscanbeaccomplishedbyusingthearrowbuttonsatthebottomofthe
LogLinkstab.
Hint:Thenumberanddescriptionofthelinkchangesasyoucyclethroughthe
availablelinks.Alsonotethatinthemodel,asyoumovefromendplate
toendplate,theintersectingcolumnattheconnectionwillhighlight.
Thisisyourindicationthatthisisthejointthatwillbeedited.
7
Mar-12
OncetheEndPlateconnectionislocated,selecttheEditbuttontoinvoke
theeditdialog.
139
EdittheconnectionasindicatedinthefigurebelowchangingtheOffsetin
thePlateDimensionssectionto350.
PresstheOKbuttontoclosethedialogandapplythechanges.
10 WhilestillintheShapePropertiesdialog,usethearrowsandcycletothe
EndPlateconnectionlocatedattheotherendofthesamebeamand
modifyitinthesamemanner.
11 SetyourmodeltoaFR1_FRONTviewandthefrontframeshouldappear
asshownbelow.
Hint:TheoffsetvaluewillbeaNegativenumberwhenthedesiredresulthas
theplateextendedbeyondthelimitsofthebeam.Thisistrueinall
casesincludinganoffsetonthetopsideofthebeam.Positivenumbers
areusedonlywhentheplateneedstobesmallerinheightthanthe
intersectingbeam.
140
Mar-12
ModifyingConnectionsUsingEditing
Exercise:ManuallyModifyingElementstoChangeaConnection
1
ReturntoanOverview1viewandzoomtothejointbetweenthebeams
andthecolumnlocatedatcoordinateB1.UsetheMicroStationDelete
Elementcommandtoerasetheboltsthatexistbetweentheconnections
ofbothbeamsonAxis1andthecolumn.
Note:Eachconnectionthatwascreatedatthislocationaddedasetofboltsto
theconnection.
2
Nowthattheboltshavebeenmanuallydeleted,youwillneedtoboltthe
connectiontogetherusingthecorrectlengthbolt.Thenewlengthneeds
tobelongenoughtoaccommodatebothendplatesandthecolumnweb
thickness.
SelectBoltsfromtheProSteelmenuorclicktheBolticon.Thiswillload
theProSteelBoltStylesdialog.
ClickontheBoltingtabandsetthevaluesasshownbelow.
Thefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsinthedialogshownabove.
Mar-12
141
Name
Description
BoltStyle
Containsthebolttype(e.g.,DIN558)fortheboltedconnections.Thedifferentbolt
typesarefiledindatabaseswhichallowsyoutoaddselfdefinedtypes.
SingleHoleBolt
Whenenabled,boltsarealsodefinedforsingleholes.Normally,twooppositedrill
holeswiththeirtolerancesdefinedinGeometrySettingarenecessaryforbolting.
Createdynamic
Connection
Ifthisfieldischecked,allinvolvedelementsarecreatedwithalogicallink.Thusthe
boltingcanbeautomaticallyadaptedifacomponentismodified.
BoltSettings
IntheDiameterfield,enterthediameterforthebolt(s)tobeusedintheconnection.
IntheWorkloosefield,enterthedesiredholeclearanceoftheboltedconnection,in
mostcases2mm.
Tolerances
IntheGapfield,youenterthedistanceuptowhichtwodrillholescanbeconsideredas
matchingandthecomponentpartsconcernedcanbeboltedtogether,inmostcases2
mm.
IntheAnglefield,youentertheangledifferenceoftwoholeaxes,uptowhichtwodrill
holescanbeconsideredtobewellalignedandthecomponentpartsconcernedcanbe
boltedtogether,inmostcases1.
Hint:Youshouldnotadjustthisvalueto0,sinceinsomecasesthiswouldpreventbolt
fasteningduetoaninexactcalculation,althoughinpracticalapplicationaconnection
wouldbepossible.
Bolting:Pressthisbuttontocreatetheconnections.Forthispurpose,youmustselect
allcomponentstobeconnectedaccordingtothedefinedmode(maximumof50parts
inoneoperation).Thentheprogramdefinesthepossibleboltsettingsandinsertsthe
boltsintothemodel.
SingleBolt:Pressthisbuttontoinsertasingleboltatthedesiredposition.
Turn:Pressthisbuttontorotateinsertedboltsformountingreasons.Forthispurpose,
selectallboltsthataretobeturned.
ClickontheBoltStyletabtodisplaythefieldsshownbelow.
142
Mar-12
ModifyingConnectionsUsingEditing
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheBoltStyles
tabshownabove.
Name
Description
BoltStyle
Theselectedstylenameisdisplayedhere.
AdditionalParts
Theoptionsalongtheleftsideofthedisplaydeterminesthecomponentsofthebolt
connection.Asyoucheckanitem,itwillappearinthedisplaytotheright.
OptionButtons
ThebuttonsontherightsideoftheAdditionalPartssectiondisplaydialogsthatprovide
moredetailedinformationaboutthecorrespondingcomponent.Foracomponent
buttontobeenabled,youmustfirstenablecheckboxforthecorresponding
componentontheleftsideofthedialog.TheonlyexceptionistheBoltbutton.Itwill
alwaysbeenabled.
Save:Clickthisbuttontosavetheboltstyleinthedrawing.Pleasenotethatyouhave
tosavethestyleherefirstandofcoursethedrawinglater,too,tokeepthe
information.
LoadfromFile:Clickthisbuttontoloadaboltstylefromafileyoureceivede.g.from
anotheruser.
SetthevaluesasshownaboveandSavetosavethestyleinthedrawing.
Note:NewBoltStylescanbecreatedthroughtheSorttabofthedialog.Once
createdandsaved,theywillbeaddedtotheBoltStyledropdownlist.
Mar-12
143
ReturntotheBoltingtabandpresstheBoltingbuttonatthebottomof
thedialog.
Theprompt:SelectallPartstobeBolted(max50):SelectObjects:
displays.
PickthecolumnandBOTHendplates.
RightMouseclick.ThiswillinsertboltsandreturnyoutotheProSteelBolt
Stylesdialog.
10 PressOKtoclosethedialog.
Hint: Youshouldnotperformthistypeofoperationuntilreadytobeginthedetailing
orcreationofaMTO.Afterperformingthisoperation,anyeditingperformed
ontheEndPlateconnectionsviathe"LogicalLinks"modificationprocedure
willreinsertboltsforeachendplatethusdoublingthequantityofbolts.
144
Mar-12
ModuleReview
ModuleReview
Questions
Mar-12
TheLayoutstabletsyouchooseoneoffourpossibleconnectiontypesin
theLayoutofPlatefield.Namethefourconnectiontypes.
WhatarethetwotypesofconnectionsassignedintheConnecttab?
WhatarethefourtabsintheBoltStylesdialog?
145
Module Review
Answers
1
Thefourconnectiontypesare:Automatic,Splice,Normal,andFlange.
TheBoltandWeldconnectionsareassignedintheConnecttab.
TheBoltStylesdialogtabsare:Bolting,ThreadedRods,BoltStyle,and
sort.
146
Mar-12
CreatingBasePlatesandCross
Bracing
ModuleOverview
Inthismodule,youwilllearnhowtocreatebaseplatesoncolumns;howtodrill
thebaseplatetoaccommodateanchorbolts;andhowtocreatedynamicand
staticbracings.
ModulePrerequisites
BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.
Previousexperiencewith3DCADsystempreferablyMicroStationV8i
Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended
ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:
Mar-12
UsetheBasePlatecommandtoinsertBaseplatesonacolumn.
CreateBasePlatesusingthePlatecommand
UsetheDrillcommand
CreateDynamiccrossbracing
147
CreatingBasePlatesonColumns
InthislessonyouwilllearnhowtousetheBasePlatecommandtoinsertbase
platesonacolumn.YouwillalsolearnhowtocreateBasePlatesusingthePlate
commandinconjunctionwiththeModifyfunctionstoshortenshapes.
Exercise:UsingtheBasePlateCommandtoInsertBasePlatesatColumns
1
Ifnotalreadyloaded,opentheTRNMODEL.dgndrawingfile.
SelectZoom/Views>IsometricOverviewfromtheProSteelmenu.
ZoominonthebottomendofthecolumnatcoordinateA1.
SelecttheBaseplatesoption:selectProSteelmenu>Connections>
BaseplatesorclickBaseplatesicon.
WhenpromptedtoSelecttheShapetoconnect,pickthecolumnnearthe
bottomend.
SetthevaluesintheProSteelDSTVBaseplatedialogasshownbelow,
startingwiththeLayouttab.
SetthevaluesintheHolestab,asshownbelow:
148
Mar-12
CreatingBasePlatesonColumns
Mar-12
SetthevaluesintheConnecttab,asshownbelow:
SetthevaluesintheDatatab,asshownbelow:
149
10 SetthevaluesintheDowelstab,asshownbelow:
11 SetthevaluesintheAssignmenttab,asshownbelow:
150
Mar-12
CreatingBasePlatesonColumns
12 Whenfinishedsettingtheparameterspressthecheckmark.
13 RepeatthisprocessonthecolumnatcoordinateA2,B1,B2,C1,andC2.
ThefollowingtablesprovideadescriptionofthefieldsintheProSteelDSTV
Baseplatedialog.
Name
Description
LayoutTabFieldsandDescriptions
SelectedColumn
Displaysthecolumnselectedforbaseplate.
PlateWidth
Widthofthebaseplate(paralleltothesupportflange),relatedtoaverticalsupporting
shape.
PlateHeight
Heightofthebaseplate,relatedtoaverticalsupportingshape.
PlateThickness
Thicknessofthebaseplate.
GroutThickness
Enterthegroutthickness,orhowhightheplateshallbeabovethecurrentNiveau.
AlignPlateto
ShapeNormal
ThebaseplatewillbeenteredverticallytothelongitudinalinProfileDirection:axisof
thesupportinthisfield.Ifnot,thebaseplatewillbealignedparalleltothex/yaxisof
theWCS,provided,itisa"real"support.
ShortenColumn
Thesupportingshapeisshortenedbytheplatethicknessandthegroutspace
underneathinthisfield.Otherwise,thebaseplateisfastenedtothesupport.Thepoint
ofreferenceisdeterminedbytheshapeaxisinthecaseofinclinedsupports.
FormGroup
Thebaseplateandthesupportmemberarearrangedtoformagroupinthisfield.Ifthe
supportmemberisalreadypartofanothergroup,thebaseplateisassignedtothat
group.
AsPolyplate
Ifthisfieldischecked,thebaseplateisalwaysalignedparalleltowardsthex/yplane
andthesmallesttorsionissearched.Otherwiseitisalignedparalleltowardstheflanges
.
Mar-12
151
Name
Description
HolesTabFieldsandDescriptions
InnerHoles
DrillInnerHoles:Enablethisoptiontocreateinnerholesaccordingtothesettings
below:
HoleDistance:Enterthewidthoftheinnerholefield,or0ifyouonlywantholesinthe
Height.
HoleDistance:EntertheHeightoftheinnerholefield,or0ifyouonlywantholesinthe
width.
HoleDiameter:Enterthediameteroftheinnerholefield.
OuterHoles
DrillOuterHoles:Enablethisoptiontocreateouterholesaccordingtothesettings
below:
Number:Inthesetwofields,inputthenumberofdesiredholesintheOuterHolefield.
HolefieldWidth:EnterthetotalWidthoftheouterholefield.
HolefieldHeight:EnterthetotalHeightoftheouterholefield.
HoleDiameter:Enterthediameteroftheouterholefield.
ConnectTabFieldsandDescriptions
WithTieBolts
IfWithTieBoltsisselected,theanchorboltsaredisplayedbysymbolsandcanbe
enteredinthepartslist.
WithAnchorbolts Insertsanchorboltsalsointheouterholefield.
outside
Label
Descriptionfortheanchorbolts.
UseDowel
UseAnchorDowelsinsteadofasymbolicbolt.Thedowelsarestoredinadatabase
whichisdefinedinthefieldbelow.Thebrowsebuttonallowsyoutonavigatetothe
desireddatabase.
WeldStyle
Definetheweldstyletobeusedinthisfield.
WeldFlangeSide
Enablethisoptiontouseweldsontheflangesideoftheconnectionshape.The
thicknessfieldnexttothisoptionallowsyoutoenterthethicknessoftheweldifyou
wanttooverridetheweldstylethickness.
WeldWebSide
Enablethisoptiontouseweldsonthewebsideoftheconnectionshape.Thethickness
fieldnexttothisoptionallowsyoutoenterthethicknessoftheweldifyouwantto
overridetheweldstylethickness.
DataTabFieldsandDescriptions
ColumnLoadin
kN
Maximumforcetobecarriedbytheplate.
Holediameter
Listofstandardizedholediameters.
Concrete
Concretegradeoftheelements.
152
Mar-12
CreatingBasePlatesonColumns
Name
Description
Available
Standard
Baseplates
YouwillfindbaseplatesfortheclickedsupportingshapeunderSelectionTemplates.
ThesearedefinedaccordingtothestandardDASTguidelines.
Thevaluesinthefieldsbelowaredisplayedandcanbechanged.Whenyouselecta
plate,thebaseplateisimmediatelyattached;youcanthendirectlychecktheresult
andmakemodifications,ifnecessary.
Note:Theplatewidthandtheplateheightrefertoverticalsupports.Thevaluesare
correspondinglyincreasedtomaintaintheshapeedgesinthecaseofinclinedsupports.
Clone
Pressthisbuttontoapplythedataofanalreadyexistingbaseplatetoanewplate.This
requiresthatyoupresstheExistingBasePlatebutton.
Exercise:Preparingtheelementforamanualbaseplate
TheremaybetimeswhenusingtheBasePlatecommandmaynotbethebest
methodofaddingabaseplate.Inthesesituationsyoucancreatethebaseplate
byshorteningthecolumnusingtheModify
commandandtheninsertingthe
plateusingtheplatefunctions.
1
Zoomtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
ZoominonthebaseofcolumnlocatedatcoordinateB3.
OpentheElementModificationdialog(clickModifyicon).
ClickontheShapestab.YouwillusetheShortenShapesbyDefault
functiontoshortenourcolumnbyadistanceequaltoourfabricatedbase
platethickness.
SettheDefaultfieldvalueto25mm.
PresstheByDefaultbuttonandwhenpromptedto:Selectshapeatthe
Endtobeshortened.
Pickthecolumnneartheend.Thiswillshortenthecolumnbythevalueof
25mm.
Hint:BeforeusingtheShortenbyDefaultfunction,makesuretowindowinon
theelementtobeshortened.Asthecommandautomaticallyshortens
thecolumnwhenpickedwhenzoomedoutyoumaynotnoticethe
shorteningoftheelementandwillpickthesameelementtwice,thus
shorteningtheshapeasecondtime.
8
PressOKtoclosethedialog.
Usingthesameprocess,shortenthecolumnlocatedatcoordinateC3.
Mar-12
153
Exercise:CreatingabaseplateusingthePlatescommand
1
WhilestillzoomedinonthecolumnatcoordinateC3,invokethePlates
command(ProSteelmenu>Plates)orclickPlatesicon.
IntheProSteelPlates/Polyplatesdialogsettheparametersasshown
below.MakesuretoselecttheCENTERinsertionpointintheimageofthe
plate.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheProSteelPlates/
Polyplatesdialog.
Name
Description
Length
Setstheplatelengthiftheplateisrectangular.
Width
Setstheplatewidthoftheplateisrectangular.
Thickness
Thicknessoftheplatetobecreated.Eitherenteravalueorselectavaluefromthelist.
HeightOffset
Theinsertionplaneoftheplateismovedbythisvalueinnegativedirectiontowardsthe
referenceplane(activeACSorelementACS).
Dimensions
EntertheplatedimensionintotheLengthandWidthfieldsifyouhaveselectedthe
contourRectangular.
XOffset
SetstheplateXOffsetiftheplateisrectangular.
YOffset
SetstheplateYOffsetiftheplateisrectangular.
ItemNo
ChangesthePlatearticlenumber
154
Mar-12
CreatingBasePlatesonColumns
Name
Description
Grid
IftheActiveLayerfieldisenabled,theplatesarenotinsertedintheplatelevel(default
isPS_PLATE)butratherinthecurrentMicroStationlevel.
IftheGridfieldisenabled,anadditionalgridisvisibleattheuppersidetodisplay
gridirons,forexample.
InsertPlane
Hereyouindicatethereferenceplanefortheinsertionoftheplate.
IftheCurrentACSfieldismarked,thecornerpointsofthepolylinearereferencedwith
thecurrentACSwhencreatingtheplateifyouhaveselectedthecontourAdapt
Contour.ThisisthestandardcaseifthedrawnplylineislocatedwithintheACS.
IftheObjectACSfieldismarked,theelementACSofthepolylineisconsideredtobe
thereferenceplanewhencreatingtheplateifyouhaveselectedthecontourAdapt
Contour.UsethissettingifthepolylineisnotlocatedinthecurrentACSandyouwant
toinsertaplatetoit.
TheUserDefinedPlaneisdefinedbytwolines(onwhichyouhavetoclick).Thus,this
willallowyoutoalignaplateonashape.Thisisworkingwhenyoucreateaplateby
selectingpoints.
InsertEdge
TheselectionTop,Middle,orBottomdeterminestheinsertionplaneoftheplate.
Pleasenotethatthevaluesfortheinsertionheightapplyuptothisplane.
Options
Label:Allowsyoutoselectthenameofthepolyplate
Material:Choosethematerialfromthislist,whichwillbeassociatedwiththeplateinthe
partslist.
DisplayClass:EnablestheselectionoftheDisplayClassoftheplate.
Description:EnablestheselectionoftheFreeDescriptionoftheplate.
ActiveLayer:EnablesyoutoselecttheLevelfortheplate.
InsertPolypoint:Insertsapolypointbyspecifiedpoints.
Placement
Options(inorder InsertonPolygon:Insertsaplatebyaselectedpolygon,circleorarc.
oficons)
InsertRectangularPlate:Insertsarectangularplateonaninsertionpoint.
InsertRectangularPlate:Insertsarectangularplateonaselecteddiagonal.
RectangularonLine:Insertsarectangularplatealongaline.
FourPoints:IftheBy4Pointsfieldischecked,youdeterminetheformoftheplateby
pickinganyfourpointsinthespaceyoulike.Thefirstthreepointsdetermineatthesame
timetheinsertionplaneoftheplate.Thefourthpointisplumbedtowardsthisplane.Thus
youhavethepossibilitytocreateaplatewithoutsettingtheACSbefore.
SteelintoPoly:Transformsalreadyinsertedflatsteelshapesintoplates.Thiscansome
timesbeuseful,ifyouwanttocarryoutmodificationswhichcannotbemadewitha
shape.
Template:Allowstheusertonameandsavethecurrentsettingsasatemplatethatcan
berecalledlater.
Dimension:Pressthisbuttontorespecifythereferencelinefortheplatelength.
Grid:Enablethisoptiontorespecifythereferencelinefortheplategrid.
AdditionalFlange:Enablescreationofadditionalflangestoaplate.
PresstheInsertbuttonatthebottomofthedialogandwhenprompted
to:PickInsertpointoftheRectangularPlate,pickthebottomshapepoint
ofthecolumn.
Theplatewillbecreatedatthispointandyouwillreturntothedialog.
Mar-12
RepeattheprocessonthecolumnlocatedatcoordinateB3.
155
DrillingtheBasePlatetoAccommodateAnchorBolts
Inthislesson,youwilllearnhowtousetheDrillcommand.
Exercise:DrillingtheBaseplate
Nowthatyouhaveinsertedthebaseplates,youwillneedtodrilltheseto
accommodateanchorbolts.UsetheDrillcommandtoaccomplishthis.
1
Zoomtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
Zoomintotheareaofthebaseplatelocatedatthebaseofthecolumn
locatedatcoordinateB3.
SelecttheDrilloption(ProSteelmenu>Drill)orclickDrillicon.
IntheProSteelDrilldialogloadssettheparametersshownbelow.
156
Mar-12
DrillingtheBasePlatetoAccommodateAnchorBolts
Thefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsinthedialog.
Name
Description
HoleField
Description
Layout:Thefollowingoptionsareavailabletosetthelayouttypefortheholefield:
Rectangular:Forarectangulardrillholefield,thedrillholesarearrangedasarectangle
withrowsandcolumnsaroundtheinsertionpoint.
Radial:Ataradialdrillholefield,thedrillholesarearrangedinacompleteorpartial
circlearoundtheinsertionpoint.Whenthisoptionisselected,additionalinputfields
willbedisplayedasshowninthedialogbymeansofwhichrounddrillholefieldscanbe
determined.
SingleHoles:Whenthisboxisactivated,thedrillholedescriptionisignored,andyou
candrillindividualholesintotheshape
Shape/XDir:Descriptionofdrillholefieldinshapedirection,forplatesinxdirectionof
theACS.Detailsonhowtodescribeadrillholefieldaregivenonthenextpage.
Cross/YDir:Descriptionofdrillholefieldperpendiculartotheshapedirection,for
platesinydirectionoftheACS.
Number/Radius:EnterthenumberofdrillholestobecreatedintheNumberfieldand
theradiuswhichthedrillholesaredistributedaroundtheinsertionpointintheRadius
field.
Area/Start:IntheAreafield,enterthenumberofdegreesthattheboltholesaretobe
distributedaround(forinstancethevalue180forasemicircle).Ifyouenterthevalue0,
thecompletecirclewillbeused.Youcanenteranangleofthefirstdrillholetowards
theinsertionXaxisofthecomponentintheinputfieldStartifthepartialcirclehasto
berotated.
ShapeCenter:WhentheShapeCenterboxhasbeenclicked,allpointsontheshape
centerlineareputperpendiculartotheshapecenter.
IftheShowAxisfieldischecked,themidline,gravityline,andtracingdimensionsare
displayedafterclickingtheshape.Theaxesareremovedagainafterthedrillinghas
concluded.
Data
Diameter:Entertheholediameterhere.
Workloose:Additiontotheholediameterasentered,e.g.,forgalvanizing.
SlotLength:IfintheinputfieldSlotAxisavaluebiggerthan0hasbeenentered,the
holeisdrilledasslottedhole.Theenteredvaluedeterminesthedistancebetweenthe
twoholeswhicharedrilledasslottedholes.
Incaseofaslottedhole,twodrillholeswithapitchasenteredintheinputfieldwillbe
created,andthespaceinbetweenwillbecutout.
Mar-12
157
Name
Description
Layoutand
Position
HoleType:
DrillThroughmeansthatthematerialwillbecompletelydrilledthrough.(Ifatopflange
isdrilled,thebottomflangewillnotbedrilledthrough.)
DrillBlinkHolemeansthatthedrillholehasthedepthasenteredintheBoreHole
Depthfield.
Weldmarksmeansthatsmallholesarespotdrilledformarkingaddonpieces.
Dimensioningofthesesmallholescanbecarriedoutautomatically.
FlangeSelection:
UpperChordmeansthattheflangewhichis"reachedfirstbythedrill"willbedrilled.
LowerChordmeansthatthesecondflangewhichis"reachedbythedrill"willbe
drilled.Thisfunctionallowsabottomflangefromthetopviewtobedrilledonthe
shape.
BothChordsmeansthatbothflangesaredrilled.
CreateThreadedhole:Createsathreadedhole.Thiswillappeardifferentlyin2D.
Single:Youcaninsertthecompleteholefieldorseveralsingleholesintooneshape.
First,clicktheshapeortheplate.Thenclickortypetheholefieldinsertionpoint.
Whenhavingselectedsingleholes,youcaninsertdifferentsingleholesuntilyoupress
theEnterkeyortherightmousebutton.
Allholeswillbedrillednow.
Multiple:Youcaninsertholesinseveralshapesatthesametime,e.g.,whenshapesare
placeduponeachother,andaholeforathroughrodshallbedrilled.First,clickall
desiredshapesorplatesandthendrilltheholesasdescribedinSingle.
Eachoftheselectedshapesbeinghitbyanimaginarybeamthatstartsattheinserted
drillholes(inbothdirections,thebeamdirectionisthepositionoftheholeaxis!)willbe
drilledatthepointofimpact,theholesizebeingidentical.Thus,theholesareexactly
aligned.
Adopt:Drillholesinshapescanbetakenoveraccordingtothe"beamprincipal"
describedinMultiple.Inthiscase,theentriesinthedialogareignored.First,clickall
shapeswithholestobetransferredandthenallshapestoadoptthehole.Usingthis
function,drillholesfromaconnectingplatemayberapidlytransferredtoashape.
PresstheSettingstabandsetthevaluesshownbelow.
158
Mar-12
DrillingtheBasePlatetoAccommodateAnchorBolts
Hint:Iftheholesarenotimmediatelyvisible,changetheViewDisplayto
Wireframe.
Thefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsinthedialog.
Name
Description
HoleTypeGroup
NormalDrill:theholesaredrilledasnormalholeswhicharedrilledthroughandwhich
alwayshavethesamediameter.
Countersunk:Ifthisfieldisenabled,theholesaredrilledascountersunkholes.Inthe
neighbouringinputfields,youcanspecifythecountersunkdepthandtheopeningangle
ofthehole.
StepHole:theholesaredrilledasstepholewithtwodifferentdiameters.Theupper
diameterisbiggerthanthelowerdiameter.Intheneighbouringinputfields,youcan
specifythedepthandthediameteroftheupperholesection.
Depth/Angle
Depthsetsthelengthofthestraightpartofthecountersunkhole.
TheAnglesetstheupperopeningangleforthecountersunkhole.
Depth/Radius
DepthsetstheLengthofthelowerpartofthestephole.
TheRadiussetsdiameteroftheupperpartofthestephole.
HoleType
Mar-12
HoleType:TheselectionlistoffersyouseveralHoleTypestochoosefrom,which
determineshowthedrillholesappearinthedetailedshopdrawings.Youcanchoose
fromHoleRepresentation,FieldDrill,FieldBolt,orShopBolt.
159
Name
Description
Offset
Youcandefinearelativeoffsetbywhichtheactualholeinsertionpointtobemoved
awayfromtheclickedpoint.Thisenablesyoutooffsetthestartingpointofahole
groupagainsttheshapestartingpointandclickonthestartingpoint,ortoinsert
asymmetricallypositionedholegroups.
NoOffsetmeansthattheclickedpointcorrespondstotheinsertionpoint.
RectangularOffsetmeansthattheoffsetdataintheDistanceboxareassumedasx/y
values.
PolarOffsetmeansthattheoffsetdataintheDistanceboxareassumedasdistance/
pitchvalues.
Rotation
Here,youcanspecifyarotationofthedrillholefieldaroundtheinsertionpoint.
Distances
Theseboxesareactivatedifyouselectedarelativeoffsetunder'Offset'.Ifyouhave
selectedRectangularasoffset,youcanenterthetwodistancesintheinputfieldsX
OffsetandYOffset.IfyouhaveselectedPolarasoffset,youcanenterthedistanceand
theangleinthecorrespondinginputfieldsDistanceandAngle.
Monitor
Here,youcanverifytheselecteddrillholefieldanddeterminetheinsertionpointby
meansofthesmallpoints.Thebiggerredpointshowsthecurrentinsertionpoint.
ReturntotheDimensionstabandpresstheSinglebuttonfromthe
bottomofthedialog.
Attheprompt:"Selecttheelementtobedrilled",picktheplate.
Whenpromptedto:"PicktheInsertionpointofDrillPattern",pickthe
bottomendofthecolumn.
Thiswilladdtheholestotheplateandreturnyoutothedialog.
PressOKtoendthefunction.
10 Repeatthesameprocedureonthecolumnsbaseplatelocatedat
coordinateC3.
Hint:Whendrillingobjects,besuretohavetheACSinthetopplaneofthe
objecttobedrilledorpicktheinsertionpointofthedrillpatternasthe
topsurfaceoftheobject.TheDrillcommandoperatesexactlylikeareal
worlddrillingprocess.Youwouldnotdrillupfromthebottomofthe
plate.Whendrillingashapesuchasawideflangeitisonlynecessaryto
picktheshapepointoftheobjectasthedrillpatterninsertionpointas
theswitches"DrillFirstFlange","DrillNextFlange",and"DrillBoth
Flanges"willcontroltheactualACSplanefromwhichthedrillpattern
originates.
Yourmodelshouldappearasshownbelow.
160
Mar-12
DrillingtheBasePlatetoAccommodateAnchorBolts
Mar-12
161
CreationofDynamicandStaticBracings
Exercise:PreparingtoCreateDynamicCrossBracing
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtopreparetheTRNMODEL.DGNtocreate
DynamicCrossbracing.
1
Zoomtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
Hint:Tobeginthecrossbracingcommandyouneedtopreparethemodel.
Thisrequiresyoutosettheviewofthemodeltotheframethatwill
containthecrossbracingandtocreateconstructionlinestoactasyour
guidesforthebracing.
2
ChangethedisplaytothesavedFR1_FRONTview(clickChooseView
icon).
Whenthedialogappears,selecttheFR1_FRONTviewfromthelistand
presstheSetViewbuttontosetmodeltothisview.
CreatetherequiredconstructionlinebydrawingaMicroStationline.
Whenpromptedto:SpecifytheStartPointofLine,selecttheobject
centreoftheupperrighthandbeam.
Next,selectthelowercentrepointofthelefthandcolumn.
Yourmodelshouldappearasshownbelow.
Exercise:DefiningandinsertingDynamicCrossBracing
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtodefineandcreateDynamicCrossBracing.
1
WhilestillintheFR1_FRONTviewselecttheDynamicBracingoption
(ProSteelmenu>Connections>DynamicBracing)orclicktheConnections
icon,followedbyclickingtheDynamicBracingicon.
162
Mar-12
CreationofDynamicandStaticBracings
Whenpromptedto:"PickSystemLineofBraceMember<Line>,Point",
picktheMicroStationdiagonallinebetweenthecolumns.
Whenpromptedto:"SelectfirstmainmembertoconnectBrace:",pick
thelefthandcolumn.
Whentheprompt:"SelectsecondmainmembertowhichBraceconnects
atoppositeend:"displays,picktheRighthandcolumn.
ThiswillopentheProSteelBracingdialog.Settheparametersasshown
below.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheCommon
tab.
Mar-12
Name
Description
Shapes
Indicatestheutilizedshapesforthebracingbars.EntertheShapeCatalogintothefirst
selectionbox,theShapeTypeintothesecond,andtheShapeSizeintothethird.
PlateThickness
Indicatesthethicknessofthegussetplate.
EdgeDistanceto
DeterminestheminimumdistancebetweenBordersorBorderobjectstothebracing
rods.
RoundShape
Lengthto
Roundsthecalculatedlengthofthebracingrodstothisvalue.
PlateWidth
Minimum
Setsthemaximumwidthofthegussetplatesifthetriangularsymmetricisselected.
Offset
SelectshowfartheGussetPlatesshalloverlaptheBracingRodssideways.
Depthaccord.
ACS
SetsthedepthoftheBracingaccordingtotheACSsystem
163
Name
Description
GussetPosition
SetsthepositionoftheGussetplatesaccordingtotheconnectionplane.
GussetType
SetstheformoftheGussetPlates.
ButtStrap
Rectangular
TriangularMinimised
TriangularSymmetrical
OpeningAngle
Hereyoucandeterminetheopeningangleofthegussetplatetowardsthebracingbar
attheshape'Trianglebent'
CrossBracing
Ifthisswitchisenabled,thebracingisdesignedintheformofacrossstay.Otherwise,
onlyonebracingbarisaddedtotheclickedonsystemline.
WeldedBracing
Ifthisswitchisenabled,thebracingisweldedinitsentirety.Noboringsareaddedin
thatcase.
FormGroup
Ifthisswitchisenabled,theindividualbracingelementsareformedintogroups.
Symmetrical
Ifthisswitchisenabled,thebracingisdesignedintheformofacrossstayandremains
symmetricalifmodified.Otherwise,everybarcanbechangedindividually.
Dynamic
Ifthisswitchisenabled,thebracingimmediatelydepictsthemodificationsmadeinthe
dialog.Ifyouwouldliketomodifymanyvalues,youcandeactivatethisoptionforthe
timebeing.
AddCuttingEdge:Bypressingthisbutton,youcanaddadditionalboundaryedges
(lines)forthegussetplatecalculation.
DeleteCuttingEdge:Pressthisbuttontodeleteanadditionalboundaryedge.
TostoptheCreationofagussetplateattheendofabracingbar,justclickonthis
button.
Includesbracingbarwhichdoesn'tbelongtothebracinginthecreationofagusset
plate
Excludesanybracingbarwhichdoesn'tbelongtothebracingfromthecreationofa
gussetplate.
164
Mar-12
CreationofDynamicandStaticBracings
Hint:TheBracingcommandmayrequirethatyou"AddCuttingEdge"inorder
tobetterdefinethelimitsofthebracingandthegussetplates.Thismay
notbeenoughtoproperlydefinetheplateinwhichcaseyoucanuse
additionalMODIFYcommandstoshapetheplatesasneeded.This
wouldincludesuchcommandsas"Extend/TrimtoLine".Alsoof
importanceisthatDynamicbracingcanbemodifiedafteritsinitial
insertion.Itwillalsodynamicallyadjustaschangesaremadetothe
adjacentmembersandthedistancebetweenthem.
Mar-12
Tocleanupthebracinggussetplates,returntotheCommontabofthe
ProSteelBracingdialog.SelecttheAddCuttingEdgefunction.
Selecttheundersideofthebeamtoreshapeandadjustthegussetplates.
Whenfinished,pressOKtoclosethedialog.
165
Exercise:PreparingtoCreateStaticbracing
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtopreparethemodeltocreateStaticBracing.
1
Zoomtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
Hint:Tobeginthecrossbracingcommandyouneedtopreparethemodel.
Thisrequiresyoutosettheviewofthemodeltoyourframethatwill
containthecrossbracingandtocreateconstructionlinestoactasyour
guidesforthebracing.
2
ChangethedisplaytothesavedFR2_BACKview(clickChooseViewicon).
Whenthedialogappears,selecttheFR2_BACKviewfromthelistand
presstheSetViewbuttontosetmodeltothisview.
NowyouwillcreatetheconstructionlineforourStaticbracing.Invokethe
linecommandandwhenpromptedtospecifythefirstpoint,selectapoint
closetothebottomofthelefthandcolumntoplacethestartofthelineat
thebaseofthecolumn.
Attheprompt:"SpecifyNextPoint:"
SelectthesnapandthenselecttheCENTERofthecrossbeam.
Anasteriskwillbedisplayedatthecentreofthebeamtoconfirmyouare
inthecorrectlocation.
Forthelastsegmentofthelinesnaptothecentreofthecolumnbase.
Yourmodelshouldappearasshownbelow.
166
Mar-12
CreationofDynamicandStaticBracings
Exercise:DefiningandinsertingStaticBracing
InthisexerciseyouwilldefineandinsertStaticBracingcomponents.
1
SelecttheStaticBracingoption.(ProSteelmenu>Connections>Static
Bracing)orclickStaticBracingicon.ThiswillopentheProSteelStatic
Bracingdialog.SettheparametersintheShapestabasshownbelow.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheShapestab
oftheProSteelBracingdialog.
Mar-12
Name
Description
ShapeType
Selectstheshapetypeforthebracingrods.
ShapeClass
SelectstheshapethatwillbedisplayedinthefieldShapeWindow.
167
Name
Description
Resolution
Selectstheresolutioninwhichthebracingrodswillbeinserted.
ShapeSize
Determinestheshapesizeforthebracingrods
ACSLocation
Thepositionofthegussetplatewithrespecttotheplaneofthebracingisdetermined.
Thefirstimageshowstheplatefrontedge.ThesecondimageshowstheplateCenter
andthethirdimageshowstheplaterearedge.
RodInsertion
Determinesthepositionoftherodwithrespecttotheinsertionline(systemline).
YoucaninserttherodintheMiddle,ontheGravityline,orontheRootline.
RodPosition
Youcandeterminethepositionoftherodwithrespecttothebracingplane.Youcan
checktheselectedpositionintheShapeWindowintheupperrightcornerofthedialog
field.
Frontsidemeansthattherodisflushwiththefrontedgeofthegussetplate(more
precise:inpositivezdirectionoftheACS).
Backsidemeansthattherodisflushwiththerearedgeofthegussetplate(more
precise:innegativezdirectionoftheACS).
Bothsidesmeansthatarodispositionedonbothsidesofthegussetplate.
CenteredmeansthattherodaxisisinacenteredpositionintheACSplane.
Rotation
Youcaninserttherodinitsnormalpositionorrotatedby+90degreesor90degrees.
YoucanchecktheselectedmodeintheShapeWindowintheupperrightcornerofthe
dialogfield.
Mirror
Theshapecanbeinsertedinanormalormirroredway.Youcanchecktheselected
modeintheShapeWindowintheupperrightcornerofthedialog.
168
Mar-12
CreationofDynamicandStaticBracings
Name
Description
PlateThickness
Thicknessofgussetplates.
Placement
Options
Youcancreatebracingrodsandgussetplatesinoneoperation.However,the
commandisnotsuitablefortheconnectionofseveralrodsfromdifferent
systems.Thisshouldbedoneusingasinglefunction.Youwillreturntothe
dialogfieldaftercreation.
Youcaninsertsinglerodsthatareautomaticallydrilled.Youwillreturntothe
dialogfieldaftercreation
Existingshapesaredrilledontheirends,accordingtothedefinitionsinthe
dialogfield.Youmustselecttheshapesforthispurpose.Youwillreturntothe
dialogfieldafterwards.
Agussetplatewillbecreatedautomatically.
SelectBracingRodsthathavealreadybeendrilledandthenclickBoundaryLines
forthePlateEdges.Theprogramwilltrytofindasuitableplatedimensionbykeeping
theedgedistancesandtheboundarylines.Itmaybenecessarytopickonepointatthe
plannedbracingend.Clicktheapproximatepositionofthegussetplate.Youwillreturn
tothedialogfieldafterwards.
Youcandeterminetheshapeofthegussetplate.
Selectthedrilledbracingrodsthataretobeconnectedandpickapointonthe
plannedbracingend.Clicktheapproximatepositionofthegussetplate.Theedge
distanceswillbedisplayed.
Youthendefinetheshapeoftheplatebyclickingtheedgepointsofapolyline.Youcan
checktheshapebeingcreated.Thefunctionsavailableforcreatingthepolylinearethe
sameasthoseavailablefordrawingapolylineusingMicroStation.Thedialogwillbe
restoredaftercreatingtheplate.
IfyouhavenotdeterminedtheACSplanebeforeusingthecommand,youcan
dothissubsequently:theactiveACSplane(andconsequentlytheplaneofthe
bracing)willbedeterminedbyclicking3points.Youwillreturntothedialog
fieldafterwards.
Mar-12
ClickontheConnecttabandsettheparametersasshownbelow.
169
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheConnecttab
oftheProSteelBracingdialog.
Name
Description
BoltStyle
Determinesthestyleofbolt.
Diameter
Determinesthediameterofthebolts.
Workloose
WorkloosebetweentheHolediameterandBoltdiameter.
NumberShape
Youcanenterthenumberofbolts(drillholes)inshapedirectionoftherodoneach
shapeend.Thespacingwillresultfromtheselectedboltdiameter.
NumberCross
Setsthenumberofboltsnormaltothebracingroddirection.
Distance
Setsthespacingoftheholesnormaltothebracingroddirection.
HolePosition
Youcandeterminethepositionoftheholesintherod.Youcaninserttheholesinthe
Middle,ontheGravityline,oronthePitchline.
WeldBracing
TheshapesandgussetplatesarenotdrillediftheWeldBracingfieldisselected.The
dimensionsofthegussetplates,however,aredeterminedasifdrillholeswereexisting.
Platewithout
Edges
TheedgesofthegussetplatearenotbeveledbutrightangledifthePlatewithoutEdge
fieldisenabled.
CreateGroup
WithBolts
AgroupisformedforeachrodiftheCreateGroupfieldisselected.
TheboltsofthebracingrodtobeconnectedarealsoallocatedtothegroupiftheWith
Boltsfieldisselected.
Next,settheparametersoftheDistancetabasshownbelow.
170
Mar-12
CreationofDynamicandStaticBracings
Hint:Asyouarebuildingastaticbracing,youwillneedtobuildthisin
sections.Firstyouwilldefinethebracingangles.
4
FromwithinthedialogpresstheRodbutton.Whenpromptedto:Pick
SystemLineofBraceMember<Line>Point,picktheMicroStationlineon
theleft.
Whenpromptedto:"PickBorderLineofBraceMemberorReturnforEnd
<Line>,Back,Point,"picktheleftcolumn.
Attheprompt:"PickBorderLineofBraceMemberorReturnforEnd
<Line>,Back,Point",pickthecrossbeamatthetop.
Whenpromptedathirdtimeto:"PickBorderLineofBraceMemberor
ReturnforEnd<Line>,Back,Point",rightclicktoendthedefinitionphase
andbringuptheBracingRodLengthmodificationdialog.
Settheactuallengthoftherodtomatchthefigurebelow,thenpressOK.
Repeatthisfunctionfortheotherbracerod.
Hint:Nowyouneedtocreatethegussetplatesateachendofthebracing
rods.
Mar-12
171
Ontheendsthatmeetthecolumnsyouwillcreatetwosinglerodplates.
Attheintersectionofthetworodswiththecrossbeamyouwillcreatea
commonplateforbothrods.
10 IftheProSteelBracingdialogisnotdisplayed,openitnowandpressthe
PlateAutobutton.
11 Whenpromptedto:PickConnectionEndofBraceMembertobe
connectedorReturnforEnd:SelectObjects:,pickthelowerendoftheleft
bracingrodandrightclick.
Theprompt:PickBorderLineforGussetPlateorReturnforEnd
<Line>,Back,Pointdisplays.
12 Picktheinsideedgeofthecolumnflange.
13 Whenpromptedasecondtimeto:"PickBorderLineforGussetPlateor
ReturnforEnd<Line>,Back,Point",rightclick.
14 Whenpromptedto:"PickaPointattheProposedBraceEnd:",rightclick
toplacethegussetplateandreturntotheStructuralBracingdialog.
Note:Ifpickingtheedgeofthebeamisnotrecognizedbythecommand,type
P(forpoint)whenaskedtoselectborder,thendefine2pointsalong
theedgeofthebeam.
15 Repeatthesameprocessatthelowerendoftherightbracingrod.
16 Repeattheprocessonemoretimeatthetopendofthebothbracing
rods.
17 PressthePlateAutobutton.Whenpromptedto:PickConnectionEndof
BraceMembertobeconnectedorReturnforEnd:Selectobjects:,pickthe
upperendofBOTHbracingrodswheretheymeetthecrossbeamand
rightclick.
18 Whenpromptedto:"PickBorderLineforGussetPlateorReturnforEnd
<Line>,Back,Point",pickintheloweredgeoftheflangeonthecrossbeam
andrightclicktoplacethegussetplateandreturntothebracingdialog.
19 PressOKtoexitthecommand.
Yourmodelatthelocationofthebracingshouldappearasbelow.
172
Mar-12
ModuleReview
Hint: WhenaddinggussetplatesyoucanusetheSelectPlatefunctiontodefinethe
plate.Youmustpickthebracingrodneartheendtoreceivetheplateandthen
pickapointnearthegussetplateend.Thiswillhighlighttheelementwiththe
edgesoftheplatelimitsandyouthenmustbuildaboundarythatdefinesthe
shapeoftheplate.
ModuleReview
Nowthatyouhavecompletedthismodule,let'smeasurewhatyouhavelearned.
Questions
Mar-12
WhatisthedifferencebetweenDynamicBracingandStaticBracing?
Canyoupickthelengthorwidthofacolumnandsetthosevaluesasthe
sizeofyourbaseplate?
173
Module Review
Answers
1
WhatisthedifferencebetweenDynamicBracingandStaticBracing?
WithStaticyoucreatethevariouspartsofthebracingmanually.
Canyoupickthelengthorwidthofacolumnandsetthosevaluesasthe
sizeofyourbaseplate?
Yes,yourightmouseclickonthelengthorwidthonthedialogandselect
thepicklengthoption.
174
Mar-12
PurlinCourses,WebAngles
andShearPlateConnections
ModuleOverview
Inthismodule,youwilllearnhowtopreparethemodelforthecreationof
purlins.Youwillalsolearnhowtocreateandmodifypurlins.
ModulePrerequisites
BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.
Previousexperiencewitha3DCADsystem,preferablyMicroStationV8i
Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended
ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:
Mar-12
Connections
PreparethemodelforthecreationofPurlins
CreatetwoPurlinsintheupperelevationofourstructure
ModifythePurlinstopreparefordetailingthejoints
Copeshapesandcreateatemplateofthecopeforfutureuse
Addwebanglestothecopedelementsandaddwebangleswherethecopeis
calledfromwithinthewebanglecommand
175
Introductory Knowledge
IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeingthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.
Questions
1
HowdoyousetanAuxiliaryCoordinateSystem(ACS)inMicroStation?
HowdoyourotateACStothetopofabeamusingProSteel?
176
Mar-12
IntroductoryKnowledge
Answers
1
HowdoyousetanAuxiliaryCoordinateSystem(ACS)inMicroStation?
GotoUtilities>AuxiliaryCoordinatesandchoosetheappropriateoption
fromthedialog(forexampleDefineACSbypoints).
HowdoyourotateACStothetopofabeamusingProSteel?
ChoosetheObjectACSatPointoptionfromtheProSteelViewcommands
toolbox.
Mar-12
Connections
177
CreatingthePurlins
Thissectiondescribeshowtocreatethepurlins.
Exercise:PreparingtheModelforthePurlin
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtosettheACStotheproperplaneforthe
creationofthePurlin.
1
Movetoanisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
SettheACSusingtheMicroStationDefineACS(ByPoints).
SelectPointsasbelow.
178
Mar-12
CreatingthePurlins
SavetheACSasPurlin.
Exercise:CreatingthePurlins(RoofPurlins)
Inthisexercise,youwillcreatethePurlins.
Mar-12
Connections
FromtheProSteelStructuralElementstoolbarpressthePurlinicon.
Whenpromptedto:"SelectlowerleftedgeofPurlindistribution,orESC
forsecondaryBeams",pickthetoplefthandcornerofthebeamongrid
lineB.
Whenpromptedto:SpecifyupperrightedgeofPurlinelement,pickthe
toprighthandcornerofthebeamongridlineC.
Seebelowforthepurlininsertionpoints.
179
WhentheProSteelPurlindialogappears,settheparametersasshown
belowandthenpressOK.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheCommon
tab.
Name
Description
Angle
Thepurlinsarerotatedaroundthisanglevalue,whichmeanstheyarearrangedina
diagonalfashion.
HeightOffset
ThisallowsyoutomovethepurlincourseinpositiveZdirectionbyapplyingthe
indicatedvalue.
180
Mar-12
CreatingthePurlins
Name
Description
Dynamic
Ifthisfieldischecked,themodificationsofthesettingscanbemonitoredimmediately
onscreen.
Symmetrical
Ifthisfieldischecked,theareatobefilled(objectframe)remainssymmetrical.
DrawDiagonal
Ifthisfieldischecked,theareatobefilled(objectframe)ismarkedwithtwoadditional
diagonals.
CutatEdge
Ifthisfieldischecked,thepurlinsattheedgesoftheareatobefilledarecutflush.
ValuesinthefieldLeftProjectionandRightProjectionarethennotconsidered.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheDimensions
tab.
Mar-12
Connections
Name
Description
FixedGrid
Ifthe'Grid'fieldischecked,youcanindicateintheneighboringinputfieldthe
approximatedistanceofthepulinswithintheareabetweenfirstandlastpurlin.The
programdividesthedistancesregularlyaccordingtothisspecificationandthevalueis
roundedupordowncorrespondingly.Theactualdistancesthenaredisplayedinthe
EffectiveGridField.
FreeGrid
Ifthe'Grid'fieldisnotchecked,youcanfreelydefinethegriddivisionwithinthearea
betweenthefirstandlastpurlininthe'Distances'list.Youcanvarythenumberandthe
distances,asyoulike.
Turn
Thedistancesareusedinverted.
OffsetBottom
Thedistancefromthecenterlineofthelowestpurlintotheouteredgeoftheselected
area.
181
Name
Description
OffsetTop
Thedistancesfromthecenterlineofthetopmostpurlintotheouteredgeofthe
selectedarea.
OffsetsFixed
Ifoneoftheseoptionsisactivated,theselecteddistancesarealsokeptinthegrid;
otherwisetheyarecentered.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheBorderLines
tab.
Name
Description
CutLines
Cuttingedgescanbeaddedsubsequentlytopermitthecreationofnonrectangular
purlincoursesaswell.
Clickthisbuttontoaddacuttingedge.Then,youarepromptedforaborderlinetobe
clickedortobedefinedby2points.Allpurlinsintersectionthisedgearedividedatthe
edgewiththedistancespecifiedintheCutWidthinputfield.
Clickonthisbuttontoremoveaselectedcuttingedge.
PolyCut
Apartfromcuttingedges,itisalsopossibletoaddsectionsforlightdomesorsimilar
things.Theprocedureisthesameasforsections;theonlydifferenceisthatyouhaveto
clickonapolylinehere.
182
Mar-12
CreatingthePurlins
Name
Description
Clickonthisbuttontoaddanothersection.
Clickonthisbuttontoremoveasection.
Hint:Asarule,aftercreatingapurlinyoushoulddeletetheyellowobjectthat
insertsinthemodel.Thisisusedtomodifythepurlin.
Ifbychanceyouleavethisobjectinthemodelandmodifyoneofthe
shapesthatisapartofthepurlinseparatefromtheotherelementsand
thepurlinandthengobacklaterandmodifythepurlinitselftheone
elementpreviouslymodifiedwillbereplacedbytheshapedefinedin
thepurlin.Thisholdstrueforall"ProSteelStructuralObjects".
6
SelectShapesfromthelistandsettheparametersasshownbelow:
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheShapestab.
Mar-12
Connections
Name
Description
ShapesHeadings
Thisallowsyoutoselectthedesiredshape(ShapeClass,ShapeSize,ShapeType).All
shapesareavailableforselection.
Position
Indicatestheinsertionpositionofthegirdersrelatedtotheinsertionaxis.
Rotation
Specifiestherotationoftheshapesaroundtheinsertionaxis.
Resolution
ProvidesoptionsLow,Normal,High
183
Youwillnowaddthepurlinconnections.
7
SelectthePurlinConnectioniconfromtheConnectionstoolbarand,when
prompted,selectallofthepurlinsandrightclicktoaccept.Selectthetwo
beamsthepurlinsconnecttoandrightclicktoaccept.
ThePurlinConnectiondialogisdisplayed.Settheparametersasshown
below.
SelectOKtofinishthecommand.
Exercise:CreatingthePurlins(FloorBeams)
Inthisexercise,youwillcreatethePurlinsFloorBeams.Youwillnowusethe
PurlincommandtoaddfloorbeamstothetopofFR1.
1
SelectthePurlincommand.
WhenpromptedtoSpecifylowerleftedge,selecttheshapeinsteadofthe
twocorners.
WhenpromptedtoSelectdesiredshape,selectthebeambetween
columnsA1andB1.ThenwhenpromptedtoSelectanotherdesired
shape,selectthebeambetweencolumnsA2andB2.
ThePurlindialogisdisplayedsoyoucanmodifytheparametersif
required.
HighlightDimensionsandsettheparametersasshownbelow.
184
Mar-12
CreatingthePurlins
HighlightShapesandsettheparametersasshownbelow,thenpressOK.
Theresultisthatthefloorbeamsareinsertedtothespacingenteredand
theshearplateconnectionsareautomaticallyaddedaccordingtothe
templateselected.
WewillnowinsertaUB356x171x51beamatthemidpointofthebeams
betweencolumnsA1B1andA2B2.
Mar-12
Connections
SelecttheProSteelShapesiconandsettoUB356x171x51shape.
Inserttheshapeusingthe2pointsmethod.WhenpromptedtoSpecify
theshapestartpoint,selectthemidpointofthebeambetweenA1A2.
WhenpromptedtoSpecifytheshapeendpoint,selectthemidpointof
thebeambetweencolumnsB1B2.ThenselectOK.
185
Exercise:CreatetheCopeandShearPlateConnection
Wewillnowcreatetemplatesforthecopeandshearplateconnection.The
first(Cope)willbecalledwithinthesecond(Shearplateconnection),which
wewillcallwithinthePurlindistributiondialog.
1
FromtheProSteelmenu,selectModify.
SelectEnablestoCopeoneShapeonanother.
ThepromptSelectsecondShapetoCopedisplays.
Selectanyofthe310UB32purlinshapesjustinserted.
ThepromptSelectshapeonwhichtocutdisplays.
Selectthe530UB82shapelocatedonAxis1.
186
Mar-12
CreatingthePurlins
TheProSteelCopedialogappears.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheStructuralCope
dialog.
Layout
Thisallowsyoutoselecttheshapeofthenotch.Thedifferentvariantsare
shown:
Ontheupperleft,theinitialsituationbeforenotchingisshown(theshapes
arestilloverlapping),andontheupperrightyouseetheContour.
Picturesbelowfromlefttoright:FitShapeStart(thenormalnotch),Fit
ShapeMiddleandFitShapeEnd.
CornerLayout
Edge:Thenotchesattheshaperadiiarecarriedoutwithabevelededge.
Radial:Thenotchesattheshaperadiiarecarriedoutwithadaptedradii.
Radius:Inthisinputfield,thedeterminedradiuscanbemodifiedlater.
AccessHole:Holesaredrilledintheinnercornersofthenotch.IntheRadius
inputfield,theradiusofthedrillholescanbepreset.
Mar-12
Connections
187
Align
IfFromInnerFlangeisset,thedimensionsrefertotheinsideoftheflanges.
Otherwise,thedimensionsforthedistancebetweentopandbottomflange
insiderefertotheoutsideoftheflanges.
IfFromCenterisset,thedimensionsrefertotheendoftheshape(theexact
positiondependsonthevalueintheWebDistancefield).Otherwise,the
dimensionsforthedistancebetweentopandbottomflangeedgereferto
theoutsideoftheflanges.
Distance
AllowsyoutosetdistancesfortheTopFlangeInside,BottomFlangeInside,
TopFlangeEdge,BottomFlangeEdge,TopFlangeOutside,BottomFlange
Outside,theWebDistanceandthedrillRadius.
GetFlange
Thickness
Allowsanunknownshapetobeselected.Theflangethicknessisthen
enteredintheinputfieldsforTopandBottomFlange.Ifyouhaveentereda
valueinthe+Distancefield,thisvaluewillbeadded.Usingthisfunction,a
flangedistancecanbeswiftlydeterminedwithoutknowingtheshape.As
reference,youshouldselectthesettingOuterEdge.
ListofCopes
IntheDatatab,alistofpreviouslydefinedcopesisdisplayedfroma
database.ThesedatabasefilescanbecreatedbymeansofanyDBASE
editor.Thus,youcanpreviouslydefineaselectionofthemostfrequent
copes.Inthedifferentlistfieldsyoucanseethebasicdataofthelinkageand
loadtherequiredcopebyselectinganentry.
Youwillnowsavethecopejustcreatedasatemplatesoitcanberecalled
later.
5
SelectTemplateatthebottomoftheCopedialog.
CreateanewfoldernamedTraining.
AddanewcopetotheTrainingfolder.
TypeType1intheNamefield.
Clickthecheckmark.
Thecopesettingsaresavedasatemplate.
10 PressEnter.
188
Mar-12
CreatingthePurlins
TheCopedialogisreturned.
Youwillnowdeletethecopefromthebeam.
11 Selectthecoped310UB32beam.
12 Rightclick.
13 SelectPS3DDeleteConnectionfromthecontextmenu.
TheDeletionconfirmationdialogboxappears.
14 Clickthecheckmarktoconfirmthedeletionofthecope.
Youwillnowcreateashearplateconnection,saveitasatemplate,andthen
deletetheconnection.
15 UsingtheShearplateconnection,selectanyofthepreviouslyinserted
purlins.
16 Selectthesupporting530UB82beam.
TheProSteelShearplateconnectiondialogappears.
Mar-12
Connections
189
17 Settheparametersasshownbelow.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheShapestab.
ShapeSelection
Thickness:thethicknessofthewebplate
CutPlate:Ifset,theplateiscutattheconnectingshapeincaseofbeveled
shapestobeconnected.
NormaltoCutPlane:Ifset,theplateisnotinsertedinshapedirectionat
beveledconnectingshapesbutalwaysperpendiculartowardsthe
connectingshape.
UsePolyplates:Polyplatesareinsertedinsteadofflats.
Position
selection
Position:Specifythewebsideoftheshapetobeconnected(leftorright),
whichistobeusedforattachingthewebplate.IfBothisselected,aplateis
attachedtobothsidesoftheweb.
FromEdge:Ifset,theverticaloffsetismeasuredfromupperedgeshapeto
upperedgewebplate.
LowerEdge:Ifset,theverticaloffsetreferstotheloweredgeofshapeand
webplate.
UptoFirstBolt:Ifset,theverticaloffsetdoesnotrefertotheedgesofthe
webplatebuttothecenterofthefirstdrillhole.
Gap:Enterthedistancetobeadheredtofromtheouteredgeofthesupport
shapetotheouteredgeoftheshapetobeconnected.
VerticalOffset:Enterthedistanceoftheoffsetforthewebplatefromthe
axisoftheshapetobeconnectedtowardstoportotheright(dependingon
position).Negativevaluesaffectanoppositeoffset.
18 SelecttheDistancetab.
190
Mar-12
CreatingthePurlins
19 Settheparametersasshownbelow.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheDistancetab.
Distribution
ShapeDirection
Number:numberofdrillholesinshapedirection
SlotLength:lengthoftheslot
EndOffsetinside:distanceofthelastcenterofadrillholetotheendofthe
webplateonthesideoftheconnectingshape
ConnectionEdge:distanceofthelastdrillholetotheendoftheconnecting
shapeonthesideofthesupportshape
DistanceBetween:distancebetweentwodrillholesinthedirectionofthe
connectingshape
Distribution
CrossDirection
Number:numberofdrillholesintransversalshapedirection
EdgeDistance:distanceofthedrillholestotheouteredgeofthewebplate
DistanceBetween:distancesbetweentwodrillholesinthetransversal
directionoftheconnectingshape
20 SelecttheConnecttab.
21 Settheparametersasshownbelow.
Mar-12
Connections
191
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheConnecttab.
BoltSettings
BoltStyle:Selecttheboltstyle(e.g.A325FIELD)fortheconnectioninthe
list.
Dia.:Specifytheboltdiameterfortheconnection.
Workloose:Enterthedesiredclearanceoftheboltedconnection,usually1/
16".
BoltStyleAdd/Edit:edittheboltstyleorcreateanewone.
WeldSettings
WeldStyle:Specifiesthekindofweldseam
WeldStyleAdd/Edit:edittheweldstyleorcreateanewone.
WeldConnect/SupportShapeSide:Specifywhichseamsaretobecreatedin
themodelusingtheoptionWeldFlangeSideorWeldWebSide.The
Thicknessofthedifferentweldseamsisspecifiedinthecorrespondinginput
fields.
192
Mar-12
CreatingthePurlins
22 SelecttheCopetab.
23 Settheparametersasshownbelow.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheCopetab.
Mar-12
Connections
Cope
Ifset,youcaneitherselectanalreadystorednotchvariantorenterthedata
directlyusingtheicon.
Cope
Connection
Shape
Specifyhowtheconnectingshapehastobenotched.YoucanselectTop
doublesidedorBottomdoublesided.
Gap
DefinethenecessarygapdistanceforthenotchintheGapfield.
193
24 SelecttheGrouptab.
25 Settheparametersasshownbelow.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheGrouptab.
CreateGroup
Ifset,atinsertionoftheshearplateconnection,theinsertedpartsare
automaticallyassignedtoaconstructiongroupwhichiscreated.
WithBolts/
Weldment
Ifset,theboltsandweldseamsarealsoaddedtothatgroup.
CreateaGroup
ofeachPlate
Ifset,anindividualconstructiongroupiscreatedforeachinsertedshear
plate.
Note:RemembertogothroughtheAssignmenttabtoassignalltheproper
informationtotheplateproperties.
26 Clickthecheckmark.
Exercise:AddtheShearPlateTemplateAutomaticallytoAllthePurlins
Inthisexercise,youwillcreateatemplateasyoudidfortheCopeanddelete
theconnectioninthesameway.
1
Selecttheyellow"X"(parametricline)thatappearedonthepurlinsT.O.S.
youcreatedontopoftheBentleyWorkframe.
Acontextmenuappears.
RightclickonPS3DProperties.
SelecttheConnectionspage.
194
Mar-12
CreatingthePurlins
Settheparametersasshownbelow.
Thefloorbeamsareinsertedtothespacingenteredandtheshearplate
connectionsareautomaticallyaddedaccordingtothetemplateselected,
whichincludesthecopetemplate.
Exercise:DividethePurlinsinHalfwithaNewSupportBeam
Inthisexercise,youwillusetheDivideoptionfromtheManipulatesubmenu
toseparatethepurlinsintomultiplepiecesandreadytheintersectionsfor
jointdetailing.
1
FromtheProSteel3Dmenu,selectZoom/Views>IsometricOverview.
Youwillnowinserta360UB45beamatthemidpointofthe530UB82beams
betweencolumnsA1andB1,andA2andB2.
2
SelectProSteelShapes.
Setto360UB45shape.
Inserttheshapeusingthe2pointsmethod.
SelectthemidpointofthebeambetweenA1andB1.
SelectthemidpointofthebeambetweencolumnsA2andB2.
ClickOK.
SelectChooseView.
TheChooseViewdialogopens.
SelecttheFR1_TOPview.
10 SelectSetView.
Theviewaresettotheupperframeofthestructure.
Mar-12
Connections
195
11 Settheparametersasshownbelow.
Thefloorbeamsareinsertedtothespacingenteredandtheshearplate
connectionsareautomaticallyaddedaccordingtothetemplateselected,
whichincludesthecopetemplate.
Exercise:DividethePurlinsinHalfwithaNewSupportBeam
Inthisexercise,youwillusetheDivideoptionfromtheManipulatesubmenu
toseparatethepurlinsintomultiplepiecesandreadytheintersectionsfor
jointdetailing.
1
FromtheProSteel3Dmenu,selectZoom/Views>IsometricOverview.
Youwillnowinserta360UB45beamatthemidpointofthe530UB82beams
betweencolumnsA1andB1,andA2andB2.
2
SelectProSteelShapes.
Setto360UB45shape.
Inserttheshapeusingthe2pointsmethod.
SelectthemidpointofthebeambetweenA1andB1.
SelectthemidpointofthebeambetweencolumnsA2andB2.
ClickOK.
SelectChooseView.
TheChooseViewdialogopens.
SelecttheFR1_TOPview.
10 SelectSetView.
Theviewaresettotheupperframeofthestructure.
196
Mar-12
CreatingthePurlins
11 FromtheProSteel3Dmenu,selectManipulate>Divide.
ThepromptSelecttheShapestobeDivideddisplays.
12 Selectall310UB32beamsaddedinthesecondpurlinexercise.
13 Rightclick.
Theselectionsareentered,andthepromptPickDividingPoint<Point>,
Lineappears.
Note:Tobeabletoselectmultipleshapesformodification,theMultiple
ObjectSelectionoptionforthetypeofmanipulationyouareperforming
mustbeenabledintheOptionstaboftheElementModificationdialog
(fromtheProSteel3Dmenu,selectManipulate>Dialog).
14 Clickontheendofthe360UB45beamontheupperframe.
The310UB32shapesaredividedwheretheycrossthe360UB45shape.
15 Clickthecheckmark.
Mar-12
Connections
197
CopingtheBeamandAddingWebAngleConnections
Exercise:CopingtheUB356X171x51Beam
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocopetheW8x18beamatthebeamsinAxis
AandB.
1
Zoomtoanisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewIcon).Windowinon
theareawheretheUB356x171x51beamintersectstheupper
UB533x210x101beam.
Copethebeams(clickModifyIcon).
Whenpromptedto:PickthesecondShapetoCope,pickthe
UB356x171x51shape.
198
Mar-12
CopingtheBeamandAddingWebAngleConnections
Whenpromptedto:Selectshapeonwhichtocut:,pickthe
UB533x210x101shapelocatedonAxisB.
TheProSteelCopedialogwillappear.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheStructural
Copedialog.
Name
Description
Layout
Thisallowsyoutoselecttheshapeofthenotch.Thedifferentvariantsareshown:On
theupperleft,theinitialsituationbeforenotchingisshown(theshapesarestill
overlapping),andontheupperrightyouseetheContour.Picturesbelowfromleftto
right:FitShapeStart(thenormalnotch),FitShapeMiddleandFitShapeEnd.
CornerLayout
Edgemeansthatthenotchesattheshaperadiiarecarriedoutwithabevelededge.
Radialmeansthatthenotchesattheshaperadiiarecarriedoutwithadaptedradii.In
theRadiusinputfield,thedeterminedradiuscanbemodifiedlater.
AccessHolemeansthatholesaredrilledintheinnercornersofthenotch.IntheRadius
inputfield,theradiusofthedrillholescanbepreset.
Align
IfFromInnerEdgeisactivated,thedimensionsrefertotheinsideoftheflanges.
Otherwise,thedimensionsforthedistancebetweentopandbottomflangeinsiderefer
totheoutsideoftheflanges.
IfFromCenterisactivated,thedimensionsrefertotheendoftheshape(theexact
positiondependsonthe'webdistance'value).Otherwise,thedimensionsforthe
distancebetweentopandbottomflangeedgerefertotheoutsideoftheflanges.
Mar-12
Connections
Distance
AllowsyoutosetdistancesfortheTopFlangeInside,BottomFlangeInside,TopFlange
Edge,BottomFlangeEdge,TopFlangeOutside,BottomFlangeOutside,theWeb
DistanceandthedrillRadius.
GetFlange
Thickness
Pressingthisbuttonallowsanunknownshapetobeclicked.Theflangethicknessis
thenenteredintheinputfieldsforTopandBottomFlange.Ifyouhaveenteredavalue
inthe+Distancefield,thisvaluewillbeadded.Usingthisfunction,aflangedistancecan
beswiftlydeterminedwithoutknowingtheshape.Asreference,youshouldselectthe
settingOuterEdge.
ListofCopes
IntheDatatab,alistofpreviouslydefinedcopesisdisplayedfromadatabase.These
databasefilescanbecreatedbymeansofanyDBASEeditor.Thus,youcanpreviously
defineaselectionofthemostfrequentcopes.Inthedifferentlistfieldsyoucanseethe
basicdataofthelinkageandloadtherequiredcopebyclickingonanentry.
BeforeexitingtheCopedialog,savethecopejustcreatedasatemplateso
itcanberecalledlater.
PresstheTemplatebuttonatthebottomoftheCopedialogtodisplaythe
dialogshownbelow.
199
Createanewfoldernamed"StructCopes",thenaddanewcopetothis.In
theNamefieldtypethenameCope1.NextpresstheSavebuttontosave
thesecopesettingsasatemplate.PressEntertoreturntotheCope
dialog.
200
Mar-12
StructuralElements
ModuleOverview
Inadditiontoallofthedescribedconstructiontools,ProSteelenablesthe
generationofrepeatedlyoccurringstandardconstructioninparameterizedform
thesocalledstructuralobjects.Thesearepredesignedsmallconstruction
sections,suchashandrails,stairs,orhangarframes,whichyoucanmodifyto
yourownrequirements.
Thestructuralobjectsaregeneratedbytheprogramaccordingtoprespecified,
adjustableconstructionmethodsifthesecorrespondwithyourrequirements
youcangenerateanentirehandrail.AlthoughthisisanewMicroStationelement,
youcanlateraccesseachandeveryindividualbuildingcomponent,andadapt
andmodifyitindividuallyusingtheProSteelstandardfunctions.
Note: Whenworkingwithstructuralobjects,youshouldrememberthatthese
individualchangesarelostifyousubsequentlymodifythestructuralobject
usingthedialogbox.Thereasonforthisisthat,inthecaseofstructural
objects,onlythedialogparametersaresaved,notyoursubsequentdialog
independentmodifications.
ModulePrerequisites
Mar-12
BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.
Previousexperiencewitha3DCADsystem,preferablyMicroStationV8i
Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended
201
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Structural Elements
Module Objectives
ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:
Usethehandrailfunctionality
Createstairs
Usetheladderandframestructuralelements
Createcustomworkframes
Structural Elements
202
Mar-12
CreatingtheHandrail
CreatingtheHandrail
Inthislesson,youwilllearnhowtopreparethemodelforcreationofahandrail;
createthehandrail;andattachthehandrailtoyourstructure.
Exercise:PreparingtheModelfortheHandrail
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtosettheACStotheproperplaneforthe
creationofthehandrailanddrawtheLineStringneededtoconstructthe
handrail.
Zoomtoanisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
ResettheACStoglobal.
StarttheMicroStationPlaceSmartLinecommandandplacealinearound
theupperareaofframeFR1.
Exercise:CreatingtheHandrail
1
PresstheHandrailiconontheStructuralElementstoolbar.
Whenpromptedto:SelectSmartLine,picktheSmartLineyoucreatedin
thepreviousexercise.
ThiswilldisplaytheProSteelHandraildialog.
SettheparametersintheDimensionstabasshownbelow.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheDimensionstab.
Mar-12
203
Structural Elements
Name
Description
Connection
Height
ThedistancebetweenthedrawnSmartLineandthebeginningofthepostsincluding
possiblefasteningplate.
RailingHeight
Thedistanceoftheupperedgeofthenewelpostsorthecenteroftherailinghead(ifin
place)measuredperpendiculartotheSmartLine.
UpperRailHeight:Thecenterdistanceoftheupperkneehighrail(ifinplace)
measuredperpendiculartotheSmartLine.
MidRailHeight:Thecenterdistanceofthemiddlekneehighrail(ifinplace)measured
perpendiculartotheSmartLine.
LowerRailHeight:Thecenterdistanceofthelowerkneehighrail(ifinplace)measured
perpendiculartotheSmartLine.
HandRailRadius
Radiusoftherailingheadatthecornersofthehandrail.Ifaradiusisspecifiedthe
correspondingshapebendsareapplied;otherwiseamiteredjointiscut.
KneeRailRadius
Radiusofthekneehighguardrailatthecornersofthehandrail.Ifaradiusisspecified
thecorrespondingshapebendsareapplied;otherwiseamiteredjointiscut.
KickPlateRadius
Radiusofthebaseboardatthecornersofthehandrail.Ifaradiusisspecifiedthe
correspondingshapebendsareapplied;otherwiseamiteredjointiscut.
PostDistance
TheapproximatespacingoftherailpostswithintheindividualSmartLinesegments.
Dependingonthesetting,theprogramusesthisinformationtospaceoutthenewel
postsinregularintervalsandroundsthevalueupordownasneeded.
Maximum
Ifthisfieldisenabled,thepostdistancesareregardedasthemaximumvalue.If
necessaryadditionalpostsareinserted.
EdgeOffset
Thespacingofthecornerpostsbetweentwohandrailsegmentsstartingwiththe
intersectionoftheSmartLinesegments.
Min.Segment
Length
EntertheminimumDistanceforatleastonepost.
Min.seg.2posts
EntertheminimumDistancefortwoposts.
StartOffset
Projectionofthekneehighguardrailsandtherailingheadstartingfromthemiddleof
thefirstrailposttowardstheoutside.
EndOffset
Projectionofthekneehighguardrailsandtherailingheadstartingfromthemiddleof
thelastrailposttowardstheoutside.
ConnectSphere
Dia.
Entertheradiusofthickeningattheintersectionpointsbetweenthepostsande.g.the
kneehighguardrails.
Structural Elements
204
Mar-12
CreatingtheHandrail
Name
Description
Dynamic
Ifthisfieldisenabled,youcanmonitorthesettingsimmediatelyonscreen.
DrawDiagonal
Ifthisfieldisenabled,adiagonaloftheactualstructuralelementisdrawninthe
differentsegmentstosupportaneasierselection.
SelectPostDistribution.Settheparametersasshownbelow:
Mar-12
SelectShapes.Settheparametersasshownbelow.Youwillselectseveral
differentshapeclasses.
205
Structural Elements
IntheShapestabyoucanselecttheprofilesfortheindividualsectionsofthe
handrail.SelectahandrailoptionfromtheShapeClasslist,thensetthedesired
Structural Elements
206
Mar-12
CreatingtheHandrail
parametersforthatoption.OnlyShapeClassoptionsthathavebeendefinedwill
beplacedinthemodel.
TheAngleandMirroroptionsallowyoutorotatetheshapesofthedifferentparts
ofthehandrailaroundtheirinsertionaxis.Thisisofgreatimportancein
combinationwithunsymmetricalshapes.SettherotationAngletoeither0,90,
180or270forthecorrespondingpartofthehandrailandchecktheMirrorfield
iftheshapehastobemirrored.
Youcanaddakickplatetothehandrail.TheoptionsintheKickPlatetab,
however,willonlybeactivatediftheKickPlateoptionhasbeendefinedinthe
Shapestab.Theremainingfieldsaredescribedinthefollowingtable.
Name
Description
OtherSide
Ifthisfieldisenabled,thebaseboardwillbeinsertedattheothersideoftherailing
posts.
SideOffset
Thisallowsyoutospecifythedistanceofouteredgeofrailingpostandinneredgeof
baseboard.Thispermitsyoutokeepsomespaceforindividualfasteningsorgrouts.
HeightOffset
Thedistancebetweenthedrawnpolylineandtheloweredgeofbaseboard.Negative
valueswillmovethebaseboardtowardsthebottom.
IntheLayoutandPositionlist,youselectthefasteningofthehandrailposts.If
Noneisselected,nofasteningwillbeprovided.IfVerticalisselected,theplates
Mar-12
207
Structural Elements
willbeperpendiculartothepost.IfLateralisselected,platesorbentconnections
willbeweldedtotheoutsideofthepost.
Structural Elements
208
Mar-12
CreatingtheStairs
CreatingtheStairs
Exercise:CreatingtheStair
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreatetheStairelementandmodifyits
settings.
1
Movetoanisometricview(ProSteelmenu>Zoom/Views>Isometric
Overview).
SetACStoglobal.
PresstheStairsiconontheStructuralElementstoolbarorgotoProSteel
menu>StructuralObjects>Stairs.
Whenpromptedto:SpecifystartpointoftheStairs,typeintheabsolute
coordinatesX,Y,Z.
Whenpromptedto:Specifystairdirection,pickapointtotheleftofthe
insertionpoint.
ThiswilldisplaytheProSteelStairdialog.Settheparametersasshown
below.
DescriptionsofthefieldsintheProSteelStairdialogareprovidedinthe
tablebelow.
Mar-12
Name
Description
Width
Thewidthofthestaircaseacrossoutersteeledge.
Length
Entirelengthofthestairconstruction.
209
Structural Elements
Name
Description
Height
Theheightofthestaircasefromstartingpointtostairheadincludinggridiron.
Riser
Thedesiredriseofthestaircasesteps.
RiserCount
Theresultingnumberofsteps.
Angle
Theresultinggradientofthestaircase.
Going
Theresultingexacttreaddepthofthesteps.Thisvaluecan,however,alsobe
determinedbeforeandtheconstructionwillbecalculatedanewaccordingtothis
value.
ActualRise
Theresultingexactriseofthesteps.Thisvaluecan,however,alsobedetermined
beforeandtheconstructionwillbecalculatedanewaccordingtothisvalue.
Upperinsert
point
Ifthisfieldischecked,theinsertionpointissituatedontheuppersideofthestaircase
insteadofthebottomside(anditisextendedtowardsthebottom).
Dynamic
Ifthisfieldisenabled,youcanmonitorthesettingsimmediatelyonscreen.
Template
Allowsyoutonameandsavethesettingsforlateruse.
SelectBasis,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:
Structural Elements
210
Mar-12
CreatingtheStairs
Name
Description
LowerLanding
Length
Lengthofthelowerstairhead.Tocreatethestairhead,youhavetochecktheinput
fieldinfrontofit.Otherwise,thestaircasecheeksarecutatthebasicplaneandthe
stairheadisomitted.
US_Definition
IftheUSDefinitionfieldhasbeencheckedadditionally,thestairheadlengthsare
definedaccordingtoUSstandards.
UpperLanding
Length
Lengthoftheupperstairbase.
Stairfootlength
EnterthelengthoftheStaircasefoot.
Verticalsection
Allowsyoutoenteraverticalcutfromthefrontedgeofthestaircasecheek.Thisfieldis
onlyavailablewhenyoudidn'tspecifyalengthofstaircasefoot(i.e.thestaircasecheek
isdirectlyrunningintothefloorlevel.)
Grounddistance
Allowsyoutoenteragapbetweenstaircasefootandfloorleveltohaveroome.g.for
anadditionalconstructionorforfoundations.Thisfieldisonlyavailablewhenyou
didn'tspecifyalengthofstaircasefoot(i.e.thestaircasecheekisdirectlyrunninginto
thefloorlevel.)
WebGrating
Thickness
Heightoftheattachedgridirons.
SideOffset
Theprojectionoftheattachedgridironsbeyondtheouteredgeofthestaircase
construction.Negativevaluesdecreasethedimensionofgridirons.
SelectPlatforms,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:
Mar-12
211
Structural Elements
Name
Description
No.ofplatforms
Enterthenumberoffloors(intermediatestairheads).
InnerDistance
Enterthemeasurebetweentwostaircases(includingcheekshapes)iftheintermediate
stairheadsarestairheadsforchangeover.
PlatformNo.
Selecttheflooryouwanttoprocess.
Length
Lengthofthecurrentplatform.
Height
Heightofthecurrentplatform.
LowerLanding
Length
Lengthofthelowerlandingofthecurrentplatform.
UpperLanding
Length
Lengthoftheupperlandingofthecurrentplatform.
AngletoPrevious Ifyouenterananglehere,youcancreatethebentrunningofthestaircaseorstair
Platform
headsforchangeover(180).Negativevaluescreateanoppositesenseofrotation.
SelectShapes,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:
10 SelecttheBoltspage,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:
Structural Elements
212
Mar-12
CreatingtheStairs
Name
Description
ShapeClass/Size/ Allowsyoutoselecttheshapesforthestairandstairheadercheeks.
Type/Resolution
DrillStringer
Ifthisfieldisenabled,thestaircheeksaredrilledtopermitboltingthestepsorthe
handrail.
BoltHandrailto
Stringer
Ifthisfieldisenabled,thecheeksandthehandrailareboltedifahandrailexists.
Selecttherequiredbolttypeintheselectionlist.
BoltTreadto
Stringer
Ifthisfieldisenabled,thestepsandcheeksarebolted.Selecttherequiredbolttypein
theselectionlist.
11 SelectTreads,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:
Mar-12
213
Structural Elements
Name
Description
CreateTreads
Ifthisfieldisenabled,thestairstepsaregenerated.
StepType
Provides(3)optionsStandardSteps,TreadsBuiltfromShapesandBlocksteps.
TreadsBuiltfromShapesIfthisfieldisenabled,thestepsaregeneratedfromshapes
insteadofasDINsteps.Intheselectionlistsyoucanselecttherequiredshapeasusual.
Allshapesareavailableforselection.
Increment
Thedepthofthestaircasesteps.
b,d,c
Distancesforthemountingholesofthestaircasesteps.
"b"isthedistanceoftheholesfromtheupperedgeofthesteps,"c"istheheightofthe
fasteningofstaircasesteps,"d"istheholespacingofbothmountingholes.
HoleSpacing
Thespacingofthesteps'mountingholes.
HoleDia.
Theholediameterofthesteps'mountingholes.
SlotLength
Thedistanceoftheaxesoftherearoblongstephole.
Offset
Theoffsetofthestaircasestepsfromthefrontedgeofthestaircasetotheback.
Negativevaluesmovethestepstothefront.
Note: ThetypeofstepthatisselectedfromtheStepTypelistcontrolswhichsetof
parametersaredisplayedintheTreadstab.Moreinformationonthe
parametersforthedifferentsteptypescanbeaccessedfromtheProSteel
help.
12 SelectHandrail,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:
Structural Elements
214
Mar-12
CreatingtheStairs
Name
Description
CreateHandrails
Ifthisfieldisenabled,ahandrailisaddedtothestaircase.
Handrail
Connection
Allowsyoutospecifytheboltingofhandrailandstaircasecheek.
Automatic:Theprogramtriestodeterminethemostsuitablefastening.
Vertical:Thehandrailisalwaysboltonthestaircasecheekfromabove,independently
ofthesettingsintheusedhandrailtemplate.
BySide:Thehandrailisalwaysboltlaterallyonthestaircasecheek,independentlyof
thesettingsintheusedhandrailtemplate.
Individual:Thesettingsinthehandrailtemplateareused.
Mar-12
StartOffset
Allowsyoutoenteranoffsetvaluethatmovesthestartofthehandrailfromthefront
edgeofthestaircasetotheback.Negativevaluesmovethehandrailtothefront.In
caseofstaircaseswithoutbasicstairhead,youcanthusmovethestartofthehandrail
toapositionwhereaboltmountingispossible.
EndOffset
Analogouslytostartoffset,youenterhereanoffsetvaluefortheendofthehandrail.
SideOffset
Allowsyoutoenteranoffsetvaluethatmovesthehandrailfromtheouteredgeofthe
staircasetotheoutside.Thispermitsyoutomountthehandrailoutsidethestaircase
onothershapesoronthewall.
HeightOffset
Allowsyoutoenteranoffsetvaluethatmovesthehandrailfromtheupperedgeofthe
staircasecheektothetop.Thispermitsyoutoattachagroutoranindividualfastening.
SideOffset
Ifyouenteravaluebiggerthan0inthisinputfield,averticalconnectingplateis
insertedbetweenplateandstaircasecheekincaseoflateralmounting.
215
Structural Elements
Name
Description
Handrail
Template
Selectthetemplatetobeusedforthehandrailintheselectionlist.Thistemplate
describestheexactstructure.Thehandrailtemplatesarecreatedbymeansofthe
structuralelement'Handrail'andthetemplatefunction.
HandrailSettings Byclickingthisbutton,youcanpresetthehandrailstructure(shapes,distances,etc.)or
edittheusedhandrailtemplates.Anotherdialogopenswhichisidenticalwiththe
'Handrail'structureobject.Thusyoucanrefertothisdialogforfurtherinformation.
13 Next,clickontheWorkFrametab.
Hint: AseparateWorkFramecanbecreatedshowingadirectoverviewonthe
staircasetoallowforbetterworkingatthestaircasewithintheboundsofa
biggerconstruction.ByclickingthefieldsFrontView,LateralViewLeft,Lateral
ViewRightorTopView,youcancreatethecorrespondingworkingframe.You
canenterthegeneralnameoftheworkframeintheGroupNamefield.Ifyou
enteravalueintheEdgeDistancefield,thesizeofthedifferentframesis
decreased.Thus,youcanbetterselectframesthatarelyingnexttoeachother.
14 PressOKtoclosetheProSteelStairdialog.
Themodelshouldlooklikethefigurebelow.
Structural Elements
216
Mar-12
CreatingtheStairs
Mar-12
217
Structural Elements
LadderandFrameStructuralElements
Inthislesson,youwilllearnhowtodothefollowing:
Createaladder
Createaframe
Createacustomworkframefordetailing
Exercise:CreatingaLadder
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreatetheLadderelementandmodifyits
settings.
1
Startanewmodel(Filemenu>New).StartwiththeseedfileProSteelV8i
Metric.dgn.Nameit"TRNMODEL2.DGN".
SelecttheLaddersiconfromtheStructuralElementstoolbar.
Theprompt:Specifyleftinsertionpointofladderdisplays.
Pickapointinthemodel.
Whenpromptedto:Specifyrightinsertpointofladder,pickapointtothe
rightofthefirstpoint.
Whenpromptedto:PickaTopPoint(+ALTKey),holddowntheALTkey
andpickapointtowardthetoprighthandcornerofthedrawingarea.
ThiswillopentheProSteelLadderdialog.
SettheparametersforeachtabasshownbelowthenpressOKtoinsert
theladder.
Structural Elements
218
Mar-12
LadderandFrameStructuralElements
DescriptionsofthefieldsintheDimensionstaboftheProSteelLadderdialogare
providedinthetablebelow.
Name
Description
Width
Thewidthoftheladderascleardimensionbetweentheuprights.
Height
Theheightoftheladderwithoutpossibleprojectionashelpforclimbingout.
Riser
Thedesireddistancebetweentherungs.Theprogramdividesthedistancesbetween
firstandlastrungregularlyaccordingtothisspecificationandthevalueisroundedup
ordowncorrespondingly.
Actualriser
Theactualresultingdistancebetweentherungsisdisplayed.
DistancetoFloor
Thedistancebetweentheupperedgeofthefirstrungandthegroundareaofthe
ladder.
TopDistance
Thedistancebetweentheupperedgeofthelastrungandtheclimbingoutareaofthe
ladder.
Offset
Theheightofthehelpforclimbingoutrelatedtotheclimbingoutsurfaceoftheladder
(axismeasure).
Stringer
Thedepthofthehelpforclimbingout(axismeasure).
SharpBend
Thefrontjumpinofthehelpforclimbingout(axismeasure),ifithastobecreatedwith
abend.
Dynamic
Ifthisfieldisenabled,youcanmonitorthesettingsimmediatelyonscreen.
DrawDiagonal
Ifthisfieldisenabled,adiagonaloftheactualstructuralelementisdrawnintheladder
tosupportaneasierselection.
FitLadderRung
Ifthisfieldisenabled,theRungsaredisplayedevenifthereisnoShapegiven.
Mar-12
SelectShapes,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:
219
Structural Elements
DescriptionsofthefieldsintheShapestaboftheProSteelLadderdialogare
providedinthetablebelow.
Name
Description
SelectionLists
Selecttheshapesoftheladderuprightsandrungsasusual.Allshapesareavailablefor
selection.
0,90,180,270
Youcanrotatetheprofilesaroundtheirinsertionaxisherebycheckingtherequired
angle.
Mirror
Ifthisfieldisenabled,theprofilewillbemirroredbeforeinsertion.
SelectWallMounting,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:
Structural Elements
220
Mar-12
LadderandFrameStructuralElements
DescriptionsofthefieldsintheWallMountingtaboftheProSteelLadderdialog
areprovidedinthetablebelow.
Name
Description
0,90,180,270
Youcanrotatethewallprofilearounditsinsertionaxisherebycheckingtherequired
angle.
Mirror
Ifthisfieldisenabled,thewallprofilewillbemirroredbeforeinsertion.
Position
Selecttheinsertionpositionofthewallprofile.
InnerEdge:Ifthisfieldisenabled,thewallshapeisinsertedattheinneredgeofthe
uprightandshowstotheinside.
Centrally:Ifthisfieldisenabled,thewallshapeisinsertedinaxispositionontheheight
ofuprightaxis.
OuterEdge:Ifthisfieldisenabled,thewallshapeisinsertedattheouteredgeofthe
uprightandshowstotheoutside.
WallDistance
Thedistancebetweenuprightaxesandwallsurfacewheretheladderhastobe
mounted.
DistancetoFloor
Thedistancebetweentheaxisofthefirstwallprofileandthegroundareaofthe
ladder.
Distance
Thedesireddistanceofthewallprofiles.Theprogramdividesthedistancesbetween
thefirstandlastwallprofileregularlyaccordingtothisspecificationandthevaluesare
roundedupordowncorrespondingly.
TopDistance
Thedistancebetweentheaxisofthelastwallprofileandtheclimbingoutareaofthe
ladder.
Template
Allowsyoutonameandsavethesettingsforlateruse.
Clone
Youcantransmitthedataofanexistingconnectiontothenewconnectionbyclicking
theexistingwebangleconnection.
Mar-12
SelecttheSafetyCagepage,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:
221
Structural Elements
DescriptionsofthefieldsintheSafetyCagetaboftheProSteelLadderdialogare
providedinthetablebelow.
Name
Description
0,90,180,270
Youcanrotatetheprofilearounditsinsertionaxisherebycheckingtherequiredangle.
Mirror
Ifthisfieldisenabled,thewallprofilewillbemirroredbeforeinsertion.
Position
Selecttheinsertionpositionhowthestiffeningringisconnectedwiththeupright.
InnerEdge:Ifthisfieldisenabled,theconnectionbetweenstiffeningringanduprightis
insertedattheinneredgeoftheuprightandshowstotheinside.
Centered:Ifthisfieldisenabled,theconnectionbetweenstiffeningringanduprightis
insertedinaxispositionontheheightofuprightaxis.
OuterEdge:Ifthisfieldisenabled,theconnectionbetweenstiffeningringandupright
isinsertedattheouteredgeoftheuprightandshowstotheoutside.
Radius
Specifytheradiusofcagestiffeners.
NumberofRungs Specifyhowmanylongitudinalrungsthecagehastoconsistof.Thebarswillbedivided
regularlyontheresultingsemicircle.
LowerRadius
Structural Elements
SetstheInnerradiusofthesafetycageattheloweredge.
222
Mar-12
LadderandFrameStructuralElements
Mar-12
Name
Description
LowerDistance
Setsthedistanceofthelowertothenextconnectionofthesafetycage.
Distance
Thedesireddistanceofthestiffeners(rings)ofthesafetycage.Theprogramdividesthe
distancesbetweenthefirstandlastringregularlyaccordingtothisspecificationand
thevaluesareroundedupordowncorrespondingly.
223
Structural Elements
CreatingCustomWorkframes(View)
Exercise:CreatingaCustomFrame(View)
Inthisexerciseyouwilllearnhowtocreateacustomworkframetobeusedby
theChooseViewcommandandforthelateruseinthedetailing.
1
Ifnotalreadyloaded,opentheTRNMODEL.dgnfile.
SelectZoom/Views>ObjectViewCenteredfromtheProSteelmenu.
Theprompt:SelectelementtosetViewto,orRETURNtoaligntheViewis
displayed.
SelectoneofthePurlinsontheawning.
Whenpromptedto:PickdesiredAxis,pickthemagentaaxispointing
upwardsawayfromthemodel.
Nowthatyouhavethedesiredplanedepictedinourmodelyoucanbegin
theprocessofcreatingthecustomview.
Structural Elements
OpentheChooseViewdialog(clickChooseViewicon).
SelecttheCreateNewWorkframebuttonandnamethenewview
AWNING_P.
PressOK,andwhenpromptedto:Selectlowerleftcornerofdesired
window,usethesnapandpickthebottomlefthandcornerofthepurlin.
Whenpromptedto:Selectupperrightedgeofdesiredwindow,picka
pointtotherightandabovethefirstpointtoincludeallofthepurlinsand
thefirstpartofthemountingbeams,similartothefigurebelow.
ThiswillcreatetheviewandreturnyoutotheChooseViewdialog.Press
theCancelbuttontoendtheprocess.
224
Mar-12
CreatingCustomWorkframes(View)
10 Returntoanisometricoverview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
11 Totest,selectZoom/Views>ChooseView.Whenthedialogappearspick
onyournewlycreatedviewAWNING_PandthenpicktheSetView
button,ordoubleclickontheview.
Mar-12
225
Structural Elements
Structural Elements
226
Mar-12
Extras
ModuleOverview
ThismodulecontainsinformationoncreatingshapesinProSteel,includinguser
created,standarduser,roofandwallpanels,combinedandweldedshapes.It
alsoexplainsexportingafiletopureAutoCAD,determiningthecenterofgravity,
collisiondetection,andtheunfoldfunction.Usercreatedshapes
ModulePrerequisites
BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigation,etc.
Previousexperiencewitha3DCADsystem,preferablyAutoCAD.
Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended.
ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:
Mar-12
CreateaprofileusingclosedPolylines.
Usetwoormorenativeshapestocreateacombinedshape.
Createaweldedshape.
ExporttopureAutoCAD.
Calculatethecentreofgravity.
UsetheCollisionDetectionfunctionandtheUnfoldfunction.
227
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Extras
UserCreatedShapes
ProSteelprovidesfunctionalitytocreatedifferentuserdefinedshapes.Using
UserShapes,CombinedShapes,RoofandWallPanellingShapesandWelded
Shapes,theusercancreateanyuserdefinableshapesduringaProSteelsession
andusethemonthefly.Theseshapeswillreactinasimilarfashiontonative
ProSteelshapes.
Shapescreatedbytheuserareclassifiedincatalogues(foldersontheharddrive).
Tolearnaboutthesetoolsstartanewdrawingorworkonthesideofthecurrent
model.
Extras
228
Mar-12
StandardUserShape
StandardUserShape
UsershapescanbecreatedfromMicroStationLines,openorclosedSmartLines,
withorwithoutinternalislands(withclosedSmartLines).
Mar-12
229
Extras
Exercise:CreateasimilarprofileusingclosedSmartLines
Inthisexercise,youwillcreateafiguresimilartotheimagejustshown,usingone
externalclosedpolylineandtwointernalclosedpolylines.
1
SelectCreateUserShapefromtheProSteelEdittoolbar.
SelectUserShapes.
RightclickandselectCreateanewCatalog.
Extras
Type"Training"intheprovidedfield.
Rightclickonthe"Training"catalogue.
SelectCreateUserShape.
230
Mar-12
StandardUserShape
TypeMyFirstUserShapeintheprovidedfieldusinganormalresolution.
RightclickonMyFirstUserShape.
SelectCreateNormalResolution.
Thedialogtemporarilydisappears.
10 SelecttheoutercontourPolyline.
11 Selecttheinnerislands,thenpressEntertwice.
AtthispointtheUserShapeiscreatedandreadytobeusedfromthe
Shapedialog(seebelow).
Mar-12
231
Extras
Extras
232
Mar-12
StandardUserShape
Mar-12
233
Extras
Roof&WallPanels
Createasimilarprofile(seeillustration)usingaclosedSmartLine.
TheproceduretocreateRoof&WallPanelShapesisidenticaltotheabove
processtocreateaStandardUserShape.
CombinedShapes
CombinedshapescanbecreatedoutoftwoormorenativeProSteelshapes,user
definedshapesoramixofboth.Createasimilarprofile(seeillustration)using
nativeProSteelshapes.TheshapemustbeverticalinthecurrentACSSystem.
Note: Theshapesusedtocreateacombinedshapeshouldbeinthesameorientation
andtheyshouldnotbemirrored.
Extras
Exercise:Usingtwoormorenativeshapestocreateacombinedshape
1
FromtheProSteelEdittoolbarclickonCreateUserShapeicon.
IntheUserShapeManagertaboftheProSteelUserShapeManager
dialogselectCombinedShapes.
RightclickandselectCreateanewCatalog.
234
Mar-12
CombinedShapes
Type"Training"intheprovidedfield.
Mar-12
Rightclickonthe"Training"catalogueandselectCreateCombiShape.
Type"MyFirstCombinedShape"intheprovidedfield.Atthispointyou
cancreatethreedifferentrepresentationsforlow,normalandhigh
resolutionsof"MyFirstCombinedShape".Youwillcreateanormal
resolution.
Rightclickonthe"MyFirstCombinedShape"andselectCreateNormal
Resolution.Thedialogwilltemporarilydisappear.
235
Extras
Combined Shapes
Selectbothsteelshapes(SandC),thenrightclicktwice.TheUserShape
Propertiesdialogwillappear.
Type"MyFirstCombinedShape"intheNamefield.Theoptionally
providedinformationwillappearinthePS3DPropertiesandcanbe
extractedintheBillofMaterials(B.O.M.).
10 CompletethecreationprocessbyclickingtheOkcheckmark.
AtthispointtheCombinedShapeiscreatedandreadytobeusedfrom
theShapedialog(seebelow).
Extras
236
Mar-12
CombinedShapes
Mar-12
237
Extras
Combined Shapes
Extras
238
Mar-12
WeldedShapes
WeldedShapes
Weldedshapesconsistsofseveralplatesweldedtogethertoformaprofile.Those
platescanbeofdifferentsizesandpositionswithinthecrosssection.Theycanbe
treatedorquantifiedasasingleshapeorasseparateplates.
SimilartonativeProSteelshapes,WeldedShapesarecreatedwithaconstant
crosssectionaldepth/heightandcanbetaperedusingthePS3DProperties.
TwodifferentkindsofWeldedshapesexistinProSteel:IFormweldedshape;and
weldedshapewithanynumberofplates.
IFormWeldedShape.Thisisashapethatismadeupofthreeplatesintheform
ofanIbeam.Thegreatadvantageofthistypeofshapeistheabilitytomodifythe
webplatebyaddingorremovingvertexesusingPS3DPropertiestocreatea
complexform(seebelow)
WeldedShapewithanynumberofplates.Thisshapeisnotlimitedbytheuseof
threeplatesintheshapeofanIbeam.
Mar-12
Exercise:Creatingaweldedshape
1
FromtheProSteelEdittoolbarclickonCreateUserShape.
IntheUserShapeManagertaboftheProSteelUserShapeManager
dialog,selectWeldShapes.
RightclickandselectCreateanewCatalog(seebelow).
Type"Training"intheprovidedfield.
239
Extras
Welded Shapes
Extras
Rightclickonthe"Training"catalogueandselectCreateWeldshape.
Type"MyFirstWeldedShape"intheprovidedfield.
240
Mar-12
WeldedShapes
Atthispointyoucancreatethreedifferentrepresentationsforlow,
normalandhighresolutionsof"MyFirstWeldedShape",youwillcreatea
normalresolution.
Rightclickonthe"MyFirstWeldedShape"andselectCreateNormal
Resolution.ThedialogwilltemporarilydisappearandtheWeldShape
editorwillappear.
ClickonAddanotherElementtotheShapeDefinition.Anewplateis
insertedattheoriginwith0degreerotation.
Enterthesettingsandvaluesasshownbelow.
10 Repeatpreviousoperationthreemoretimesasshownbelow.
Mar-12
241
Extras
Welded Shapes
11 EndtheprocessbyclickingtheOKcheckmark.TheUserShapeProperties
dialogwillappear.
Extras
242
Mar-12
WeldedShapes
12 Type"MyFirstWeldedShape"intheNamefield.Theoptionallyprovided
informationwillappearinthePS3DPropertiesandcanbeextractedinthe
B.O.M.
13 ClosetheUserShapePropertiesdialogbyclickingtheOKcheckmark.
14 ClosetheProSteelUserShapeManagerdialogbyclickingOK.Atthispoint
theWeldedShapeiscreatedandreadytobeusedfromtheShapedialog
(seebelow).
Mar-12
243
Extras
ExporttoPureMicroStation
YoucanconvertanyProSteelmodelintoapureMicroStationnativefile.Asa
matteroffact,youhavetwooptionstodothis:
ThefirstoneistoconvertaProSteelfile(plan,elevationordetail)intopure
MicroStationlines.UsetheProSteel>2D>CreateNativeDrawingcommand
forthisoption.
ThesecondoptionistoimportaProSteelmodelintoanothersoftwarethat
recognizesMicroStationsolidsbutnotProSteelobjects.UsetheProSteel>2D
>CreateSolidsFilecommandforthisoption.
Thesetwocommandsproduceafilethatisstrictlyforviewingordistributionto
clientsorsubcontractorsthathaveMicroStationbutnotProSteel.The
MicroStationfilecanalsobeusedtocheckthemodel.IntheMicroStationfile,
linesandarcswillbeconvertedintoMicroStationcells.
Note: WhenyouconvertaProSteelmodeltoMicroStation,youloseallProSteel
informationinthecurrentfile.Thisisnota"SAVEAS"procedure.When
exportingaProSteelmodeltoMicroStationworkonacopyofthemodel.
CentreofGravity
Usethisfunctiontocalculatethecentreofgravityofanynumberofselected
parts.(Traditionallythisisusedtodeterminewheretoplaceliftinglugs,finding
outglobalweightandvolume)
Tostart,clickCentreofGravityonProSteel>CollisionDetectiontoolbar,then
selectanynumberofshapes,plates,etc.
Aspherewillbecreatedatthecentreofgravityoftheselectedobjectsand
informationsimilartothefollowingwillappearatthecommandline/textscreen.
ResultingBodyweightinSteelis6084.886
CoordinatesofCenterofGravityareX=8047Y=4700Z=3526
ResultingBodyvolumeis0.774m^3
Note: Differentspecificweightsareignored;thisfunctionconsidersthatallselected
partsaremadeofsteel.
Extras
244
Mar-12
CollisionDetection
CollisionDetection
ThisfunctionisusedtodetectclashesbetweenProSteelobjects.Itisdesignedto
visuallyinspectanddetectcollisionsincongestedareas;itisnotmeanttoclash
detectamassivestructure.
Tolearnthisfunction,createtwocrossingpipesasshownbelow.
Exercise:UsingtheCollisionDetectionfunction
1
ClickCollisionDetection
onProSteelEdittoolbar.
WhentheCollisionCheckdialogappears,entervaluesasshownbelow.
Click
andselectthenewlycreatedpipes.ProSteelcreatesmagenta
colouredvolumesateachcollision.
Tomovefromonecollisiontoanotherclickon
Toeraseallcollisionvolumesclickon
Mar-12
Minvolume=Clashtoleranceinmm
Displayscaling=Zoomingfactor
Actual/Max=Totalnumberofcollisions
245
or
Extras
Unfold
Unfold
Thisfunctionisusedtounfold/developanyProSteelshapewithorwithout
modifications(cuts,drills,notchesetc.)ontothecurrent/activeACS.
Tolearnthisfunction,startanewdrawingandcreatesimilarpipewithapolycut
andaBooleansubtractintersectasshownbelow.
Exercise:UsingtheUnfoldfunction
1
ClickonUnfoldfromtheProSteelEdittoolbar.TheProSteelUnfoldPipe
dialogwillappear.Entervaluesandsettingsasshownbelow.
Extras
ClicktheOkcheckmark,thenselectthepartwiththemodification,
subsequentlyplacetheresultanywhereinthemodel.
246
Mar-12
Unfold
Theresultshouldbeasshownbelow.
Mar-12
247
Extras
Unfold
Extras
248
Mar-12
ProSteelV8iMicroStation
DetailingFundamentals
ProSteelV8i
BentleyInstituteCourseGuide
44
Mar-12
DetailingFundamentals
Overview
CourseDescription
Afteryouhavecreatedamodel,completedyouredits,positionedallofthe
necessarycomponents,andpossiblyissuedapreliminarypartslist,theFinishing
orDetailingofthe3Dcomponentscancommence.ProSteelgeneratestheusual
2Dviewsofthecomponentsfortheworkshopplansusingthemodel,asfollows:
ProSteelwilldissemblethemodelintoitscomponents,analysethegeometry
ofalltheindividualparts,andascertainanyexistinginvisibleedges.
Then,dependingontherequirementsofyourselections,theshapeis
displayedinseveralviews,dimensioned,andattachedtoapositionflag.
Note: Allofthistakesplaceinasplitsecondandinthebackground.
OnceProSteelhasfinishedwithonecomponent,thiscomponentisdeposited
inalibraryintheformofablock,clearlyorganizedaccordingtotheindividual
constructiongroupsanddesignsections.
Afterthisprocedurehadconcluded,youcanfurtheruseProSteeltohelpyouwith
thelayoutofthepartsonyourdrawingsheets.Fromhereon,youcantreatthe
partsasiftheywerethetypicaldrawingsgeneratedinaCADprogram,although
ProSteelwillofferyouafewextrafunctionstofacilitateyourwork.
TargetAudience
Thiscourseisrecommendedforthefollowingaudience(s):
Mar-12
StructuralDesigner
StructuralEngineer
StructuralEngineeringTechnician
Architect
45
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Prerequisites
ArchitecturalDesigner
ArchitecturalEngineer
Prerequisites
ExperiencewithMicroStation2D/3Dexperience
ExperiencewithProSteelV8iforMicroStation
CourseObjectives
Aftercompletingthiscourse,youwillbeableto:
Definedifferentuserstylessuchasthebolt,elevationflagorweldflag
UnderstandProSteelgrouping
LearnhowtocreatePartDescriptionsandPartFamiliesforsteelmembersby
categorizingdifferenttypesofcomponents(e.g.,columns,beams,gusset
plates,etc.)
Createandsetstylesfordifferentfinal2Ddrawingtypes
Createcustomized2Ddrawingstylestothecompanystandard
Create2Dplans,elevationsandsectionsfrom3Dmodels
Createsteelsinglememberpartdetails
Createbeamandcolumngroupdetail
ModulesIncluded
Thefollowingmodulesareincludedinthiscourse:
UserDefinedStylesandSymbols
ProSteelGrouping
CreatingandManipulatingPartFamilies,PartDescriptions
PositioningandMaterialTakeOffs
ComponentsRequiredPriorto2DDrawingCreation
46
Mar-12
ModulesIncluded
Mar-12
DetailCenter
DetailStyles
Appendix,BentleyProSteelCourseSetup
47
Modules Included
48
Mar-12
UserDefinedStylesand
Symbols
ModuleOverview
Thischapterincludestwolessons:UserDefinedStyles;andUserDefinedSymbols.
Youwilllearnhowtoestablishthestylesandwhattheywillbeusedfor.
Lesson1:UserDefinedStyles
InProSteel,youcancustomize(createanduse)thegraphicalrepresentationor
symbolforBenchMarks,ElevationFlags,GridAxis,Handrail,ManualCuts,
PositionFlags,StairStepsandWeldFlags.Thoseblockscanbeassignedtostyles,
whichinturncanbeusedandspecifiedinthe3Dmodelaswellasinthe
DetailCentrefor2Ddrawingproduction.
AllProSteelblocksaregroupedintocategorieswithintheUserBlocksfolder.
Mar-12
255
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
BoltStyle
Exercise:Creatinganewboltstyle
1
OpentheexamplemodelTRNMODEL.dgn,locatedintheProject
ProSteel_Metric.
Tocreateanewboltstyle,clickfirstontheBoltingbuttonontheProSteel
Elementstoolbartobringupthedialog.
IntheSorttab,clickoncreateanewboltstyle.
Enteranameforthenewboltstyle(i.e.8.8Swith2FW),thenclickthe
checkbutton.
Yournewboltstylewillbelistedintheloadedstyles.
256
Mar-12
Lesson1:UserDefinedStyles
MovetotheBoltStyletabandselectthenewlycreatedboltstylefromthe
BoltStyledropdownlist.
Clickontheboltsettingsbuttonandenteralldesiredspecifications(see
illustrationbellow)thenclickthecheckbutton.
Mar-12
257
Nextclickonthewasherbuttonsandenteralldesiredspecificationsto
matchthefollowingimage,thenclickthecheckbutton.
Clickonthenutbuttonandenteralldesiredspecificationstomatchthe
followingimage,thenclickthecheckbutton.
258
Mar-12
Lesson1:UserDefinedStyles
Repeatthepreviousstepsifataperedwasheroralocknutaredesired.
AtthispointthenewlycreatedBoltStyleisreadyforuseintheactivedrawing,to
haveitavailableforotherdrawingsclickonthebuttonandsavethestyle
externally.
Oncethenewstyleissavedexternallyitcanbeloadedintoadrawingbyclicking
ontheLoadstyledefinitionfromafilebutton.
Mar-12
259
Detail Style
DetailStyle
ThiswillbecoveredinDetailCenterSectionofthisManual.
ElevationFlagStyle
Exercise:Creatinganewelevationflagstyle
1
Tocreateanewelevationflagstyle,clickfirstontheElevationSymbols
buttonontheProSteelUtilitiestoolbar.
IntheSorttab,clickoncreateanewelevationflagstyle.
Enteranameforthenewelevationflagstyle(i.e.DEFAULT),thenclickthe
checkbutton.
Yournewelevationflagstylewillbelistedintheloadedstyles(asfollowing
image).
MovetotheLayouttabandselectthenewlycreatedelevationflagstyle
fromtheElevationFlagdropdown.
SelectCreatedgeometry,thenclickontheEditstyle.
Enteralldesiredspecificationstomatchtheillustrationbelow,thenclick
thecheckbutton.
260
Mar-12
DetailStyle
Atthispointthenewlycreatedelevationflagstyleisreadyforuseintheactive
drawing.Tohaveitavailableforotherdrawings,clicktheSaveicontosavethe
styleexternally.
Oncethenewstyleissavedexternally,itcanbeloadedintoadrawingbyclicking
ontheLoadStyleDefinitionfromaFileicon.
PositionFlagStyle
ThiswillbecoveredinDetailCentreSectionofthisManual.
WeldFlagStyle
Exercise:Creatingaweldflagstyle
1
Tocreateanewweldflagstyle,clickontheWeldingSymbolsbuttonon
theProSteelUtilitiestoolbartobringupthedialog.
IntheSorttab,clickonCreateanewweldstyle.
Enteranameforthenewweldflagstyle(i.e.Filled5mm),thenclickthe
checkbutton.
Yournewweldflagstylewillbelistedintheloadedstyles(seeillustration
below).
Mar-12
261
Detail Style
ClickontheWeldStyleDisplaytabandselectthenewlycreatedweldflag
stylefromtheWeldstyledropdown
SelectCreatedgeometry,thenclickontheFlagspecificsettings.
Enteralldesiredspecifications(seedialogbelow),thenclickthecheck
button.
ClickonTopsideorDownsidetosetweldsymbolspecifications(see
illustrationbelow),thenclickthecheckbutton.
262
Mar-12
DetailStyle
Atthispointthenewlycreatedweldflagstyleisreadyforuseintheactive
drawing.Tohaveitavailableforotherdrawings,clickontheSaveiconand
savethestyleexternally.
Oncethenewstyleissavedexternally,youcanloaditintoadrawingby
clickingonLoadstyledefinitionfromafileicon.
Mar-12
263
Lesson2:UserDefinedSymbols
ThislessondescribeshowtocreateuserdefinedsymbolsinProSteel.
Benchmarksymbol(northdirection)
TheBenchmarkisasymbol/markerthatcanbeinsertedintothe3Dmodelto
specify/controlthenorthdirectionforerectionpurpose.TheProSteelBenchmark
hasthetabsshownbelow:
264
Mar-12
Lesson2:UserDefinedSymbols
Mar-12
265
Toinsertabenchmarkintothe3Dmodel,clicktheBenchmarkicononthe
ProSteelUtilitiestoolbar,thenspecifyanorigin/pointandanorthdirection.
ElevationFlagsSymbol
YoucancreateanydesiredsymbolfortheelevationflagwithLines,Arcs,Circles
andTextonly.AddtothemanattributewiththetagVPfortheelevationvalue,
andN1&N2forNotes1&2.ThensavetheblockintheELAVATIONFLAGSfolder.
Warning:TheattributemustnotbemirroredandshouldbeinthePositiveareainbothaxes,
sothatthelowestpointofthegraphicsisat0,0inWCSCoordinate.
ClickonElevationsymbols;thedialogwillappear.IntheLayouttabclickonBlock
pathtoselect..\LOCALISED\ENGLISH\USERBLOCKS\ELEVATIONFLAGS\.Enable
BlockGeometryandselectthenewlycreatedblockfromtheBlockGeometry
dropdown(seeillustration).
266
Mar-12
Lesson2:UserDefinedSymbols
AtthispointthenewlycreatedElevationFlagsymbolisreadytobeused.
GridTextBlocksSymbol
YoucancreateanydesiredsymbolforthegridtextblockswithLines,Arcs,Circle
andTextonly.Addtothemtwoattributes,onewiththetagLINE1forthecolumn
gridvalueandanotherifdesiredwiththetagLINE2foracolumnsubgridvalue.
SavetheblockintheGRIDTEXTBLOCKSfolder.Youwillalsoneedtocreatefour
invisibleattributesforthedockinglinesDP1,DP2,DP3&DP4.
Warning:TheattributemustnotbemirroredandshouldbeinthePositiveareainbothaxes,
sothatthelowestpointofthegraphicsisat0,0inWCSCoordinate.
Atthispointthenewlycreatedgridtextblocksymbolisreadytobeused.
ClickonWorkframe;thedialogwillappearafterspecifyinganoriginanda
direction.
IntheLayouttab,checktheAxisdescriptionsbox.IntheLayoutareaoftheTextX
tab,selectblockfromthedropdownofaxisdescriptiontype.
RepeatthesamefortheTextY;intheBlockstab,turnontheEnablefromfile
button,thenclickonBlockpathtoselect
..\LOCALISED\ENGLISH\USERBLOCKS\GRIDAXIS.Selectdesiredblocksfromthe
BlocknameXandBlocknameYdropdowns.
Mar-12
267
Atthispointthenewlycreatedgridtextblockswillbeappliedtotheworkframe.
ManualCutSymbol
YoucancreateanydesiredsymbolfortheManualCutwithlines,arcs,circlesand
textonly,thensavetheblockinthe
MANUALCUTfolder.
Atthispointthenewlycreatedmanualcutsymbolisreadytobeused.Clickon
Create2DSection.Inthedialogthatappears,intheSymboltab,enabletheBlock
button,thenspecifytheTopBlockandDownBlockbyclickingtheBlockpath
button..\LOCALISED\ENGLISH\USERBLOCKS\MANUALCUT\folder(see
illustration).
Atthispoint,thenewlycreatedManualCutscanbeusedinthedrawing.
268
Mar-12
Lesson2:UserDefinedSymbols
PositionFlagsSymbol
ThiswillbecoveredinDetailCentreSectionofthisManual.
WeldFlagsSymbol
YoucancreateanydesiredsymbolfortheweldflagswithLines,Arcs,Circleand
Textonly.Addtothemtwoattributes,onewiththetagDP1andtheothertagDP2
defininginsertionpoints.Theflagreferencelinewillconnecttotheclosestone.
Youcanalsoaddanynumberofattributesfromthelistofavailableattributes
below,thensavetheblockintheWELDFLAGSfolder.
TT:Topside/farsideThickness
TL:Topside/farsideLength
TG:Topside/farsideGap/interval
TC:Topside/line1Comment
DT:Downside/nearsideThickness
DL:Downside/nearsideLength
DG:Downside/nearsideGap/interval
DC:Downside/line2Comment
Warning:TheattributemustnotbemirroredandshouldbeinthePositiveareainbothaxes,
sothatthelowestpointofthegraphicsisat0,0inWCSCoordinate.
Atthispointthenewlycreatedweldflagsymbolisreadytobeused.Clickon
WeldingSymbols;thedialogwillappear.IntheWeldStyleDisplaytab,clickon
Blockpathtoselect..\LOCALISED\ENGLISH\USERBLOCKS\WELDFLAGS\.
EnableBlockGeometryandselectthenewlycreatedblockfromtheBlock
Geometrydropdown(seeillustration).
Mar-12
269
Atthispointthenewlycreatedweldflagcanbeinsertedintothedrawing.
270
Mar-12
ProSteelGrouping
ModuleOverview
ThischapterdiscussesGroups.EachGroupalwaysconsistsofoneprimary
componentpartandasmanysecondarypartsasdesired.Groupscannotbe
nested,whichmeansthatagroupcannotbeasecondarypartofanothergroup.
ModuleObjectives
Mar-12
LearnhowtoinvoketheGroupsdialog
Learnhowtodeterminewhatpartsexistingroupsandwhichpartsarenotin
agroup
Learnhowtomanipulatethedisplaywithinthemodelusinggroups
Learnhowtoaddpartstoanexistinggroup
271
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
ProSteel Grouping
Lesson1:ProSteelGrouping
Grouping
GroupinginProSteelissynonymoustoassembly.Itdefineswhichpartsare
detailedandshippedtogether.Duetoitsimportance,ProSteelprovidesanumber
oftoolsforcreating,editing,deleting,searching,viewing,etc.Amainmember
andanynumberofsubmembersdefineagroupstructure,however,ifdesired,a
groupcanbeassignedtoasinglememberthatisthemainpart.
Note: EachelementcanexistonlyinoneGroupatatime.Whencreatinggroups,start
withthesubgroupsandlastlytheassemblies.Inmostcasesyouwillsimply
workwiththegroups.Thesubgroupsandassembliesfeaturesarefor
exceptionaluse.
Assemblies
Assembliescanincludegroupsandsubgroupsaswellassingleparts.Thereisno
mainparttoanassembly,justacollectionofvariousobjects.Itisthelargestof
thethreegrouptypes.
Groups
Agroupisacollectionofpartsand/orsubgroups,whicharerecognizedasa
singleitem.Amainpartisassignedtothegroupandallotherpartsare
consideredsubpartsofthegroup.Thesegroupscanbecalledintoa2Ddrawing
anddimensionedtogetherasasingleitem.Groupsarethedefaulttypecreated
whendoingconnectionsandothertasksthathavetheGroupoptionwithinits
menu.
ProSteel Grouping
272
Mar-12
Lesson1:ProSteelGrouping
SubGroups
Almostidenticalinnaturetothegroups,SubGroupsarehandledinthesameway
thatgroupsareandhaveaccesstoallthesametoolsasgroupsdo.
Subgroupscanbeusedwhenonesinglepartisrequiredintwogroups.Sincea
singlepartcanonlybepartofoneGroupatatime,aSubGroupcanbeformed
andthesamesinglepartcanbeplacedintothissecondgrouptypestructure.
Exercise:InvokingtheGroupsdialog
1
Mar-12
OpentheexamplemodelTRNMODEL.dgn,locatedintheProject
ProSteel_Metric.
273
ProSteel Grouping
Selectisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
OpentheAdministrateGroupsdialog(ProSteel>Groups>Dialog)orclick
Groupicon.
ProSteel Grouping
274
Mar-12
Lesson1:ProSteelGrouping
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheAdministerGroups
dialog.
Name
Description
Create
Youcanassignpartstomaterialgroupsbyusingthisfunction.
Clickthemainpartofthematerialgroupandthenselectthepartstobeassigned.
Thepartstobeassignedcanalsobeselectedinafield.Themainpartthatmayhave
beenselectedtwiceandotherconstructionlinesareignoredinthiscase.Onlysteelor
specialpartscanbeselectedforagroup.
Thepart'snewselectionisignoredifitalreadybelongstoagroup.
Release
Agroupcanbedetachedbyusingthisfunction.Todoso,clickanypartofthegroup.
Removalofsinglepartsfromthegroupisalsopossible.
Delete
Youcandeleteallpartsofagroupwiththisfunction.Clickanypartofthegrouptodo
this.
Edit
Thisfunctionshowsthegroupdatathroughthefollowingdialog.
Youcanenterthedataoftheselectedgroupforthepartslistsinthetopfields.
ThepositioninthefieldPos.No.hasbeentakenoverfromthemainpart,providedthe
"TakeoverMainpartInfo"fieldwasselected.Subsequentmodificationoftheposition
numberispossible.
Youcanseetheouterdimensionsandthetotalweightofthegroupatthebottom.
Takeover
MainpartData
Thedataofthemainpartisacceptedasgroupdataforthepartslists.Subsequent
modificationofthisdataispossible.
AddElements
Partsareaddedtoagroupbyusingofthisfunction.Thecompletegroupwillbe
selectedwhenyouclickanypartofthegroup.FurtherAccessoryPartscanbeaddedby
clickingthem.
RemoveElements Partsareremovedfromagroupbyusingthisfunction.Thecompletegroupwillbe
selectedwhenyouclickanypartofthegroup.Clickthepartstoberemoved.
Export
Mar-12
Agroupcanbeexportedandstoredinanexternalfile.Itcanbeinsertedintoanother
drawingbyusingImportGroups.Thegroupstructurewillremainunchanged.When
prompted,selectobjectsbyclickinganypartofthegroup.
275
ProSteel Grouping
Name
Description
Import
Astoredgroupcanbeinsertedintoyourdrawingbyusingthisfunction.Theexisting
groupstructureismaintained,whenthefieldExplodeBlocksafterInsertionhasbeen
clicked,orifyoudroptheimportedcellusingPS_EXPLODE.
SelectionMode
Youdecidewhetheragroupistobeloadedcompletelywhenselectingapartofitor
whetherthepartsshallremainindependentwiththisfunction.Clickanypartofthe
group.Themodewillchangeaccordingtoyourselection,andthecurrentstatuswillbe
displayedinthecommandline.
ExportComplete WhenExporting,thisenablesyoutoselectawholegroupbyselectingjustonemember.
Group
Ifthisfieldisunmarked,youneedtoselectallPartsexplicitlytomanipulatethem.All
GroupsgeneratedbyProSteelduringaconnectionhavethisfeatureenabled.
DissolveBlock
afterInsert
Thegroupisautomaticallyexplodedwhenbeingimported.Thestructureofthegroup
remainsunchanged.
Count
AllgroupsinthedrawingarecountedanddisplayedintheNumberfieldbelowthis
button.
ClickontheVerifytabandreviewthefollowingfunctions.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheVerifytab.
Name
Description
CheckGroups
MarkOrphans:Ifthisfieldischecked,allvalidgroupsarehiddenaccordingtothe
specificationswhencheckingagroup.Partsthatbelongtonogrouparemarkedin
colour.UsethecommandGlobalSettings>Colourstospecifywhatcolourstoapply.
Colouredmarkingsareremovedonceyouassignthepartstoagrouporwhenyou
selecttheRegeneratecommand.
Orphans>
Groups
CreatesonegroupoutofeachselectedOrphanobject.
ProSteel Grouping
276
Mar-12
Lesson1:ProSteelGrouping
Name
Description
Search
Hidingothergroupscanbeusedtosearchforgroups.Enterthepositionnumbersofthe
groupstobesearchedinthefieldSearchNumbersandclickthebuttonSearch.
Selectthepartstobesearched(inmostcases,youwillselectallofthepartsinafield)
andconfirmyourselectionbypressingtheEnterkeyortherightmousebutton.Only
thosegroupswhosepositionnumbersyouhaveenteredwillremainvisible.Byusing
theRegeneratecommandyoucanrecalltheothergroups.
Severalpositionnumberscanbeenteredatthesametime,providedtheyareseparated
byadecimalpoint.Completepositionareasmustbeseparatedbyahyphen.Ifyou
searchthepositionsNo.5and7or17through28,youenterthevalue5,7,1728inthe
SearchNumbersfield.
IftheHidefieldisenabled,allpartsnotsatisfyingthesearchconditionarehidden.The
hiddenpartsbecomevisibleagainwhenthedrawingisregenerated.
IftheMarkfieldisenabled,allofthepartsfoundinthesearchedarehighlightedinthe
drawing.
IftheZoomExtentsfieldisenabled,allpartssatisfyingthesearchconditionare
automaticallyzoomed.AdialogdisplaysallowingyoutoindicatetheDisplaySize(zoom
factor)andtonavigatetoeachcomponentfound.
Mar-12
Hide
UsingtheMainPart,Singleparts,andAllPartsoptionsinthissectionyouchoosewhich
partsofagroupyoucanhide.Clickanypartofthegrouptodothis.Youcanrecallthe
partsusingtheDisplaycommand.
Display
Displaysallhiddengroupsorgroupparts.
Compare
Groupsofthesamepositionarecheckedforequalityinthisfunction.SelectmainParts
ofthegrouptobechecked.IftheCompareandchangeoptionisenabledandthe
programfindsgroupswiththesamepositionnumberbutwithdifferentstructure,
indicesareaddedtothepositionnumberstodifferentiatethem.
277
ProSteel Grouping
Lesson2:PartsinaGroup
Sometimesyoucanworkwithexistinggroupsandnotknowwhatpartsareinthe
group.Thisexerciseshowsyouhowtodeterminethisinformation.
Exercise:Determiningwhatpartsareinagroup
1
WiththeAdministerGroupsdialogdisplayedandtheVerifytabselected,
selecttheCheckGroupsbuttonandnotethedisplayinthemodel.
Refreshyourdisplaytoshowallpartsinthemodel(ProSteelmenu>
Groups>Dialog,thenpressDisplay).
Whatjusthappened?WheninitiatingtheCheckGroupsfunction,ProSteelscans
themodelandsearchesforallpartsassociatedtoagroupanddisablestheir
display.Thisactsasquickreferencetodeterminewhatpartsarenotinagroup
andleavestheseelementsdisplayed.Thiswillallowyoutobetterdetermine
whichgroups,ifany,theserogueelementsbelongin.
Beforewestartaddingthesepartsintoagroupwewillinvestigateotherfunctions
withintheGroupsfunction.
ProSteel Grouping
278
Mar-12
Lesson3:ControllingModelDisplayviatheGroupsFunction
Lesson3:ControllingModelDisplayviatheGroupsFunction
YoucanusetheGroupsfunctionalitytocontrolhowyourmodelisdisplayed.
Mar-12
Exercise:ControllingthemodeldisplayusingGroups
1
WindowAreaontheconnectionbetweenthecrossbeamandthecolumn
locatedatcoordinateA1.
OpentheAdministerGroupsdialog(ProSteel>Groups>Dialog).
ClickontheVerifytab.WiththeAllPartsoptionenabled,presstheHide
button.
279
ProSteel Grouping
Thefollowingpromptisdisplayed:
SelectPartofGrouptobeHidden
SelectObjects:
4
Pickthecrossbeamandnotethedisplayofthemodel.Rightclicktoend
theHideGroupsfunction.
Notethatallpartsofthegroupdisappearedfromtheviewofthemodel.
Thisshowshowthehidegroupsfunctioncanbeusedtocontrolmodel
display.Thisisveryimportantwhenworkingwithalargemodelcongested
bymanypartsanddetailedjoints.
WiththeAdministerGroupsdialogstilldisplayed,presstheDisplaybutton
toreturnthemodeltoafulldisplayofallparts.
Wewillperformthesameoperationagain,onlythistimewithgrouping
hidingonlycertainelementsofthegroup.
Loadthegroupfunctionand,beforepressingtheHidebutton,settheHide
sectionofthedialogtohideonlySinglePartsbyenablingthepulldown
selectionasshownbelow.
ProSteel Grouping
280
Mar-12
Lesson3:ControllingModelDisplayviatheGroupsFunction
NowpresstheHidebuttonandpickthesamecrossbeamasbefore.Note
thedisplaywithinthemodel.ThistimeonlytheSubPartsofthegroup
havebeenhidden.
FromProSteelmenu,selectProSteelRegentoreturnthesetthedisplayto
allparts.
Note:Beforemovingontobuildinggroupsitisimportanttodifferentiate
betweentheReleasebuttonandtheDeletebuttonthatarelocatedin
theAdmintab.
Ifyouwishtobreakupagroupandstillhavethepartsinthemodel,use
theReleasefunction.Thiswilldissolvethegroupbutleaveallpartsin
themodel.
Ifyouwishtocompletelyremovethegroupedpartsfromthemodel,
usetheDeletebutton.Thiswilldissolvethegroupanddeletethese
itemsfromthemodel.
Note: TheSinglePartsselectionintheverifytabactuallyreferstosubpartsof
groups,notsinglelooseparts.
TheSettingsTab,shownbelow,givestheuserthepossibilitytomake
multipleselectionsorloopgroupingcommand.
Mar-12
281
ProSteel Grouping
Lesson4:AddingComponentPartstoaGroup
Inthislesson,youwilllearnhowtoaddpartstoanexistinggroup.
1
Windowareaintotheareaoftwomanualbaseplateslocatedoncolumns
locatedatcoordinatesB3andC3(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
OpentheAdministerGroupsdialog(ProSteelmenu>Groups>Dialog>
Admin)orclickAdministerGroupicon.
FromtheGroupstab,selecttheAddElementsbutton.
Thefollowingpromptisdisplayed:PickaPartoftherequiredgroup
PickthecolumnlocatedatcoordinateB3.
Thefollowingpromptisdisplayed:SelectPartstoaddtotheselected
Group
Pickthebaseplatelocatedatthebottomofthecolumn.Rightclicktoend
theadditionofparts,andthenrightclickasecondtimetoendthe
function.
Note:Afterselectingthegroupparttowhichyouwilladdcomponents,the
softwarewillautomaticallyshifttotheADDfunctionandpromptyouto
pickthoseelementstoadd.Continueselectingpartsuntilyouare
finished.Rightclicktoselectanothergroupparttoadditemsto.Right
clicktwicetoendtheAddElementsfunction.
6
ProSteel Grouping
Repeattheprocessandaddtheotherplatetothegroupofthecolumn
locatedatcoordinateC3.
282
Mar-12
CreatingandManipulatingPart
Families
ModuleOverview
Inthischapter,youwilllearnhowtocreateProSteelPartFamilies,modifythem,
andcreateaPartDescriptionforthem.
ModulesObjectives
Mar-12
LearnaboutDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies
CreateDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies
AssignourWorkframetotheDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies
CycletheDisplayClassestocontroltheviewinthemodel
283
Lesson1:CreatingandManipulatingPartFamilies
Inthissection,youwilllearnwhatDisplayClasses,AreaClasses,andPartFamilies
areandhowtocreatethem.Additionallyyouwilllearnhowtoassignstructural
elementsandobjectstothemtomakeviewingthemodeleasierinthecaseof
complexmodels.
PartFamilies
PartFamiliesareamechanismtoautomaticallyallocateprefixes,coloursand
DetailStylesduringthepositioningprocessbycategorizingdifferenttypesof
components(e.g.,columns,beams,gussetplates,etc).2Dlinetypesandcolour
canalsobecontrolledthroughthePartFamilies.
Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreatePartFamilies.Someofthedisplay
classesyoucreatewillbeusedlaterinthemodellingprocess.
PartFamiliesshouldbecreated,componentsassignedtotheseandthenthePart
Familyprefixshouldbeusedduringpositioning.
Note: EachcomponentcanbelongtoonlyonePartFamilyatatime.
Exercise:CreatingPartFamiliesandassigningObjectstothem
1
OpentheexamplemodelTRNMODEL.dgn,locatedintheProject
ProSteel_Metric.
284
Mar-12
Lesson1:CreatingandManipulatingPartFamilies
OpentheProSteelPartFamiliesdialog(ProSteelmenu>PartFamilies)or
clickthePartFamiliesicon.
YoumustassignnamestothePartFamilies.Doubleclickononeofthe
emptylistentriesandenteranameintheinputfield.
Anewdialogwillappear.
Mar-12
EnterDescription,PosPrefixandColour.
285
AssignnamestoPartFamilies,asshownbelow.
286
Mar-12
Lesson2:UserdefinedPartDescription
Lesson2:UserdefinedPartDescription
ProSteelprovidesamechanismtoassignuserdefinablepart/shapedescriptions
thatcanbeusedduringthecreationandeditingofparts(e.g.,specifyinglayer,
colourandlinetype),searchingandorganizingandfilteringthedisplayofparts
andthedimensioningrulesduring2Ddrawingproduction.
Exercise:Assigningadescriptiontoashape
1
Selectashapeinthe3Dmodel.
RightclickandselectProSteelPropertiesfromthecontextmenu.
TheShapePropertiesdialogwillappear.
3
Mar-12
FromtheDescriptiondropdownintheAssignmenttab,selectany
predefineddescription.
287
Thisdropdownlistiscontrolledbyatextfile
(..\Localised\[country]\Data\pro_st3d.fdf).Itcontainssomepredefined
descriptionsbutismodifiablebytheuserwiththehelpofatexteditor
suchasMicrosoftNotepad.
ThePRO_ST3D.FDFdatacontentisarrangedasfollows:
288
Mar-12
Lesson2:UserdefinedPartDescription
Index,description[layername,layercolor,layerlinetype][,colournormal,
linetypenormal,colourhidden,linetypehidden]
Notethat"normal"impliesvisiblelineson2Ddetailsand"hidden"implies
hiddenlineson2Ddetails.
Mar-12
289
290
Mar-12
PositioningandMaterial
Takeoffs
ModuleOverview
Thismodulecontainsthreelessons:PositioningtheModel;CreatingaPartsList;
andCreatingaDrawingPartsList.EachLessoncontainsanumberofexercisesthat
aredesignedtoteachyouthetopicslistedintheobjectives.
ModuleObjectives
AftercompletingLesson1inthismodule,youwillbeableto:
SetthedefaultsforPositioning
DefinethePositionFlags
PositiontheModel
AftercompletingLesson2inthismodule,youwillbeableto:
Createanexternalpartslist
Editthepartslistdataandformat
Generatetheactualreport
AftercompletingLesson3inthismodule,youwillbeableto:
Mar-12
Learnhowtocreateapartslist
Modifythepartlistcontents
291
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson1:PositioningtheModel
Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtosetthedefaultsforpositioning,definethe
positionflags,andpositionthemodel.
Exercise1:SettingtheDefaultsforPositioning
1
OpentheexamplemodelTRNMODEL.dgn,locatedintheProject
ProSteel_Metric.
Viewtheisometricviewofthemodelbyselectingthemainmenusitem
ProSteel>Zoom/Views>IsometricOverview.
OpentheProSteelPositionflagsandPositioningdialogbyselectingthe
mainmenuitemProSteel>Positioning>Positioningorselectthe
Positioningicon.Inthedialog,selecttheSteelPositioningtab.
292
Mar-12
Lesson1:PositioningtheModel
DescriptionsofthefieldsintheSteelPositioningtabareprovidedinthetable
below:
Name
Description
Plugin
Listshowsallavailableexternalpositioningplugins.Thislistisonlyavailablewhenthe
UseexternalPlugInoptionisenabled.
Type
Allowsyoutoenterthetypeofthepositionnumber.
Numericalmeansthatthepositionnumbersarecomposedofnumbersonly.
Alphanumericalmeansthatthepositionnumbersarecomposedoflettersonly.The
orderthenisA,B,...,Z,AA,AB,....etc.
Mixedmeansthatthepositionnumbersarecomposedofanumericalandan
alphanumericalpart.Thenumericalpartisfollowingthealphanumericalpart,theorder
isA1,A2,...,A9,B1,B2,etc.Thenumberofnumericalpositionscanbepresetunder>
'Limits'.
Filter
Allowsyoutodeterminewhichpartstobepositioned.
All:Whenpressingthisbutton,allselectedpartswillbepositioned.
OnlyEmpty:Whenpressingthisbutton,onlythoseselectedpartswillbepositioned
thathavenotyetbeenassignedapositionnumber(e.g.,newparts).
OnlyChanged:Whenpressingthisbutton,onlythoseselectedpartswillbepositioned
thathavebeenchanged.Thus,afterdetailingchangedpartscanbeassignednew
positionnumbers,ifnecessarythepartsareidentifiedusing"ModificationTags,"which
willbedeletedwhenthepartconcernedisdetailed.Thismeansthatpartsareassigned
newpositionnumbersthathaveactivechangetags(queryviacommand'Shapes>
ChangeProperties>Data').
Mar-12
293
Name
Description
LastSingle
Displaysthelastusedpositionnumberforsingleelements.
LastGroup
Displaysthelastusedpositionnumberforgroupelements.
Increment
IntheIncrementfieldyouenterautomaticincrementingofthepositionnumbers
(normallybyonestep).
Next
IntheNextNo.fieldyouenterthenumbertobeassignedtothefirstparttobe
positioned.
UseShipping
Number
EnablethisoptiontouseSendNumbersinsteadofPositionnumbers.
UseXrefs
Enablestheuseofanexternalpluginforpositioninginsteadofusingthebuiltindefault
functions.
Callsthedialogforautomaticpositioning.
ResetsthePositioningoptions.
Processesautomaticpositioningonlyforsinglepartswiththegivensettings.
Processesautomaticpositioningonlyforgroupswiththegivensettings.
Processesautomaticpositioningforbothpartsandgroupswiththegivensettings.
Afterreviewingthesettingforpositioning,youwillsettheoptionsfor
AutomaticPositioning.IntheProSteelPositionflagsandPositioningdialog,
selecttheCalltheDialogforAutomaticPositioningiconandsetthe
parametersoneachtabasfollows:
294
Mar-12
Lesson1:PositioningtheModel
Mar-12
295
296
Mar-12
Lesson1:PositioningtheModel
Descriptionsofthefieldsintheabovedialogareprovidedinthetablebelow:
Name
Description
Filter
Thesepartsareconsideredincaseofautomaticpositioning.Selecttheparts(shapes,
specialshapes,plates,boltsandotherspecialparts)thataretobenumberedinone
operation.
SortFlatslikePlates:EnablethisoptiontoconsiderFlatsandPlatesequalforPre
Sorting.
PreSort(Left
Window)
SetstheorderofthePreSort.Usethearrowbuttonsnexttothewindowtomovea
valueupordown.
PostSort
SetstheOrderofthePostSort.Usethearrowbuttonsnexttothewindowtomovea
valueupordown.
Options
OverwriteExistingmeansexistingpositionnumberswillbeoverwrittenwhenassigning
newones.
IfEqualPartDetectionisenabled,thepartsarecheckedforequality.Iftheyare
identical,theyareassignedthesamepositionnumber.Partsareconsideredidentical
whendeviationswithrespecttodimensionsanddrilldiameterarewithinthevalues
givenasreferencetolerances.
IfEqualGroupDetectionisenabled,thegroupsarecheckedforequality.Groupsare
consideredidenticalwhenidenticalpartsarearrangedinthesamemountingposition
singlepartsareonlycomparedusingtheirpositionnumber(i.e.,ifpartsareidentical
buthavedifferentpositionnumbers,thegroupswillalsobeassigneddifferentposition
numbers).
IfConsiderWeldMarksisenabledthenWeldMarksareusedtocompareelements.
FirstMainParts,thenSubPartsmeansthatfirst,allmainpartsofgroupsarepositioned
(andsortedaccordingtothesortingcriteriawithinthegroups),followedbythe
accessoryparts(alsosortedaccordingtothesortingcriteria).Thiscanbedeemedasan
additional,evenhigherrankingsortingcriterion.
Subpartsstartsat:Determinesfromwhichnumber,groupsubpartswillbepositioned.
Groups
DifferentiationUnequalGroups:Whenthegroupisassignedthepositionofthemain
part(normalcase),itmayhappenthattwodifferentgroupshavingthesamemainpart
areassignedidenticalpositionnumbers.Insuchcases,theprogramwillcheckwhether
ornotthegroupsarereallyidentical.Ifnot,itwillchangethegrouppositionnumber.
25>25.1meansthechangedgrouppositionsareidentifiedbytheindex.1,etc.,
followingtheirpositionnumber(i.e.,100.1,100.2,...).
25>25AmeansthechangedgrouppositionsareidentifiedbytheindexA,etc.,
followingtheirpositionnumber(i.e.100A,100B,...).
25>MAX+1meanspositioningofthechangedgrouppositionsiscontinuedafterthe
highestpositioncurrentlyassigned.
Mar-12
297
Name
Description
GroupOptions
TheMax=SubpartMaxoptiondeterminesifthenextavailablePositionnumberisa
singleorgroupnumber
IfTakeoverMainPartPosition>Groupisenabled,thepositionofthemainpartistaken
overasgroupposition.Ifnecessary,thegrouppositionischangedafterwards(see
DifferentiationGroups).Ifthisisnotrequested,thegrouppositionswillstartatthe
positionenteredinGroupsStartattheLast[+].
PositionPrefix
Thisallowsexplanatorytexttobeenteredbeforethegroupposition.Itispossibleto
differentiatebetweensupportbeams,girdersandothergroups,thedifferentiation
alwaysbeingrelatedtothemainpartofthegroup.
InColumns,youenterthedesignationforallverticalshapes.Intheattributefield
DeviationinDegrees,youenterananglewithinwhichtheshapeisstillconsideredtobe
vertical.
InBeams,youenterthedesignationforallhorizontalshapes.Intheattributefield
DeviationinDegrees,youenterananglewithinwhichtheshapeisstillconsideredtobe
horizontal.Verticalandhorizontalarealwaysrelatedtotheworkframe,i.e.,tothex/y
planeoftheWCS.
InOther,youenterthedesignationforallothergroups.
ThePositionTolerancefieldsdeterminethepositiontoleranceforverticalcolumnsand
horizontalbeams.
IfUsePartFamilyPrefixesisenabled,thefamilyclassesprefixissetinfrontifthe
componentpartbelongstoafamilyclassandaprefixisplanned.
Tolerances
GeometryCheck
GeometryCheck:Comparesthepartswiththevisiblegeometry,lineforline.
MinimumLineLengthmeansadditionallinesuptothespecifiedlengtharenot
consideredforacomparison.
LengthTolerancemeanslengthdeviationsdonotresultinadifferentpart.
HoleTolerancemeansdeviationsofthedrillholeaxisuptothespecifiedlengthdonot
resultinadifferentpart.
Tolerances
VolumeCheck
Comparesthepartswiththevisiblevolume.YoucannotmixFacetandAcisbodies.
MaxPartDifference:Setsthemaximumdifferencein%uptowhichtheelementsare
treatedasidentical.
Max.GroupDifference:Setsthemaximumdifferencein%uptowhichthegroupsare
treatedasidentical.
Oncetheparametersarespecified,clickthecheckbuttontoreturntothe
ProSteelPositionflagsandPositioningdialog.Keepthisdialogopenforthe
nextexercise.
298
Mar-12
Lesson1:PositioningtheModel
Exercise2:DefinePositionFlags
1
ClickontheSorttabintheProSteelPositionflagsandPositioningdialog.
SelecttheCreatesaNewPositionFlagStyleicon.
CreatesaNewPositionFlagStyleicon
2
TypeSinglepartsintotheEntertheNameofthenewPositionflagStyle
dialog,andthenclickthecheckbutton.Repeatthisproceduretoadda
Boltsstyle.Whenfinished,thenewstyleswillbedisplayedintheLoaded
Styleswindow,asshownbelow:
ClickontheLayouttabintheProSteelPositionflagsandPositioningdialog.
Mar-12
299
SelectSinglepartsintheStylefiledandthenselecttheEnablesSettingof
PositionFlagStyleicon,adjacenttotheCreatedGeometryfield.
SettheparametersfortheSinglepartsstyleinthePosflagDefinitiondialog
asseenbelow.Clickthecheckbuttontoapplythesettings.
300
Mar-12
Lesson1:PositioningtheModel
Descriptionsofthefieldsintheabovedialogareprovidedinthetablebelow:
Name
Description
LineType
Allowsyoutodefinethekindofguidelinetobeused.
NoLineNoguidelinewillbedisplayed.
NormalLineOnlyonelinewillbedisplayed.
LinewithArrowAlinewithanarrowwillbedisplayed.
LinewithDotAlinewithapointwillbedisplayed.
BubbleForm
Allowsyoutodefinethekindofpositionnumber.
NoBubble:onlythenumberisdisplayed.
RoundBubble:thenumberisdisplayedinanoval.
RectangularBubble:thenumberisdisplayedinafield.
SixEdgedBubble:thenumberisdisplayedinahexagon.
OnLine:thenumberisdisplayedontheconstructionline.
TextType
Allowsyoutodefinethetypeofshapedesignationincaseoflengthindication.
U100...160:thedesignationisasfollowsIPE270...7890.
U100160:thedesignationisasfollowsIPE2707890.
U100x160:thedesignationisasfollowsIPE270x7890.
FormatTemplate:Thedesignationisasindicatedinthe'FormatTemplate'inputfield.
Alignment
Allowsyoutodeterminethedirectionoftheconstructionlinewithrespecttothe
positiontext.
AtShape:thedirectionisinparalleltoshape.
AtLine:youwillbepromptedtoenterareferencelinebyclicking.Textwillbealigned
accordingly.
AtHorizon:thedirectionishorizontal.
AtVertical:thedirectionisvertical.
TextStyle
Mar-12
Specifiesthetextstyleforthetextofthepositionflag.
301
Name
Description
DefaultFormat
Specifiestheformatfortheuserdefinedshapedesignationifyouhaveselected'Format
Template'astexttype.Thefollowingparametersareavailable.
$(N)forpartname
$(L)forpartlength
$(W)forpartwidth
$(T)forpartthickness
Theresultoftheformatstring$(N)$(T)x$(W)woulde.g.beplate5x380
PosNr.Prefix/
Postfix
IntheinputfieldPrefixorPostfixyoucanenteratextwhichisdisplayedinfrontofor
afterthepositionofthepositionflag.Thedefaultcanbesetindependentlyofeach
otherforbothnumbers.
ShippingNr.
Prefix/Postfix
IntheinputfieldPrefixorPostfixyoucanenteratextwhichisdisplayedinfrontofor
aftertheshippingnumberofthepositionflag.Thedefaultcanbesetindependentlyof
eachotherforbothnumbers.
Divide
Specifiesatextwhichiswrittenbetweenpositionnumberandshippingnumber,ifboth
numbershavetobedisplayedaspositionnumberentryinthepositionflag.
Layout
Allowsyoutodeterminewhichinformationtobedisplayed.
TotalNumber:thenumberofpartsisdisplayed,e.g.,17xIPE270.
Name:thedesignationisdisplayed(e.g.,theshapedesignation).
Comment:thecommentsofthepartslistsaredisplayed.
ItemNumber:displaytheArticlenumberofthepartsinthepositionflag.
Dimensions:displaythepartsdimensionsofthepartsinthepositionflag.
Positionnumber:thepositionnumberisdisplayed.
ShippingNumber:theshippingnumberisdisplayed.
Material:thematerialdesignationisdisplayed.
OriginalPositionNumber:thefixed(former)positionnumberisdisplayed.
Options
NoLine:suppressestheleaderlineofthepositionflag.
Dynamic:Createsanassociationbetweentheobjectandthepositionflag.
GroupLength:Usegroupdimensionfordisplayifagroupisselected.
302
Mar-12
Lesson1:PositioningtheModel
Name
Description
Size
Youcandefinethetextsizeforgeneralletteringandforpositionnumbers(No.size).For
printing,theMicroStationtextsizesarescaledaccordingtoselectedscale.
Colours
YousetthecorrespondingcolourfortheflagasMicroStationcolournumberusingthe
fieldsLine,Number,BubbleandText.Ifyouenter1asvalue,thepresettingwillbe
used.
SelectBoltsintheStylefiledandthenselecttheEnablesSettingof
PositionFlagStyleicon,adjacenttotheCreatedGeometryfield.
Note:UponselectingtheBoltsstyle,thefollowingdialogmaydisplay,
promptingyoutosavethechangestotheSinglepartsstyle.Pressthe
checkbuttontocontinuewiththeBoltsstylesettings.
Mar-12
303
SettheparametersfortheBoltsstyleinthePosflagDefinitiondialogas
seenbelow.Then,clickthecheckbuttontoapplythesettings.
304
Mar-12
Lesson1:PositioningtheModel
Exercise3:PositiontheModel
1
UseElementSelection>Blocktoselectallelementsinthemodel.
WiththeProSteelPositionflagsandPositioningdialogstillopen,selectthe
SteelPositioningtabandthenclickontheProcessAutomaticPositioning
forallPartswithGivenSettingsicon.
Note:ClickthecheckbuttonwhenpromptedtosavechangesfortheBolts
style.
Thesystemwillbeginthepositioningprocessandwhencompletewill
displaytheProSteelPositioning:ResultSinglePartdialog,asshownbelow.
ThisservesasavisualcheckonwhatSinglepartswerepositioned.Its
contentsarenoteditable.
Mar-12
ClickthecheckbuttonintheProSteelPositioning:ResultsSingleParts
dialog.TheProSteelPositioning:ResultGroupsdialogwillappearon
screen.
Clickthecheckbuttontocompletetheprocessandallowpositioningto
applythesortingandcomparisonoptions.
305
Oncethesystemreturnsustoourmodel,wewillviewtheProSteel
Propertiesofanitem.PickthecolumnlocatedatcoordinateA1andright
clicktoaccesstheProSteelPropertiesfromthepopupmenu.
AccesstheDatapageandnotethePos.No.field.SwitchtotheGroupData
pageandnotethePos.No.field.Onepositionnumberisforthepartand
theotherisforthegroup.Also,notethatthepositioninghasalsocounted
howmanyofthispartandthegroupexistinthemodel.Afterapplyingthe
comparisonoptions,thesystemnowknowsthatthismodelhastwo
groupsthatareexactlyalike(columnassembliesatA1andB1).
306
Mar-12
Lesson2:CreatinganExternalPartsList
Lesson2:CreatinganExternalPartsList
Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreateapartslist,editthepartslistdataand
format,andgeneratetheactualreport.
Exercise1:CreatethePartsList
1
Mar-12
OpenthePartlistCreationdialogbyselectingthemainmenuitem
ProSteel>Additions>PartlistDatabaseInthePartlistCreationdialog,
settheparametersasfollows:
307
Descriptionsofthefieldsintheabovedialogareprovidedinthetablebelow:
Name
Description
SelectionTypes
Allowsyoutoselectthepartsforwhichapartslististobecreated.
3Dparts:meansthatyouselectthepartsfromtheworkframe.
2Dpositionsflags:meansthatthepartslistswillbedeductedfromthepositionflagsof
adetailedworkshopdrawing.Frommodified2Ddrawingsyoucangeneratenewbillsof
materials.
Options
Verifypositionnumber:onlythoseselectedpartswillbetakenoverintothepartslists
thathaveavalidpositionnumber.
OnlyGroupParts:onlythoseselectedpartswillbetakenoverintothepartsliststhat
areassignedtoagroup.
OnlySelectedparts:Onlyselectedpartsarewrittentothepartslist.Ifdisabled,thenthe
completegroupsoftheselectedpartsarewrittentothepartslist.
CreateGrouprecord:Grouprecordsarecreatedforallcompletegroupsthatare
selected.Otherwise,nogrouprecordsarewrittenintothepartslist.
IfStartPartsListisclicked,partslistprocessingisloadedimmediatelyaftercreationof
partslistfilebymeansofthisfile.
CalculateNCCutAngles:DefinescutanglesforgenerationofaNCfilethatcanberead
byaNCmachinetofabricateasection.
StraightEndatfront:TurnstheNCdatasoaneventualstraightEndisatfront.
WithWelds:Addswelddataintopartslist.
CombineWelds:Combinesallweldsofsamestyleandthicknessintooneentry.
Bolts
IfBoltswithoutPositionNumberisclicked,boltswillbeincludedinthepartslists,even
iftheyhavenopositionnumber.WashersExtra,NutsExtra,SafetyWashersExtra,
TaperedWashersExtrameansthattheadditionalpartsfortheboltsareseparately
specifiedinthelistofmaterials.
OutputFile
ThefileforthelistofmaterialsisstoredinthefiledisplayedintheNamefield,for
example,intheXBASEformat.
BypressingtheFilebuttonyoucansetthedirectoryinthesamemannerasyouuseto
dounderWindows.
WithBolts
Bypressingthisbutton,youstartpartselection.Theselectedboltswillbeconsideredas
well.
308
Mar-12
Lesson2:CreatinganExternalPartsList
Name
Description
WithoutBolts
Bypressingthisbutton,youstartpartselection.Boltswillnotbeconsidered,even
thoughtheyhavebeenselected.
MountingList
Bypressingthisbutton,youstartpartselection.Onlythemainpartsofgroupsincluding
boltswillbeconsidered.
SelecttheEnablesSelectionofDataiconintheOutputFilesectionofthe
PartlistCreationdialogandnamethedatabaseyouwanttocreate.
Hint:Itisrecommendedthatyounamethedatabasethesamenameasthe
model.Inthisinstance,namethedatabaseTRNMODEL.MDB.
3
SelecttheCreatesaPartlistwithoutBoltsiconinthePartlistCreation
dialog.
Whenpromptedto:Selectallpartstoaddinbillofmaterial,RETURNfor
allShift+ESCforFilterandSelectObjects,keyinAllatthecommand
promptandthenpressEnter.
Allpartswillbeselectedandtheprocesswillbegin.Whenthedataisall
read,allpartsthatwerewrittentothedatabasefilewillbeturned"off"in
themodelasacheckingstep.YoucanusetheProSteelRegencommandto
bringallitemsbackonscreen.
Exercise2:EditthePartsListDataandFormat
1
Mar-12
OpentheProSteelPartlistdialogbyselectingthemainmenuitem
ProSteel>Additions>Partlist.
309
SelectFile>OpenintheProSteelPartlistdialog.Loadthe
TRNMODEL.MBDdatabase.
Hint:ThepartlistwillbeC:\Program
Files\V8i_[SELECTseries]\ProSteel\MicroStation\Localised\[country]lis\
PartList.
ThePartlistProcessingdialogwillbepropagatedasshownbelowwith
possiblyunsorteddatafromthepartslist.Inthelist,eachpartisstored
individually,butacombinationofequalpositionswillbecarriedoutatthe
timeofprintout.Youcanopenseveralfilesatthesametime.Theopened
fileswillbedisplayedinthelistActDatabaseontheleftsideofthedialog.
Byclickingafilename,thefilewillbeyourcurrentworkfile.Theparts
containedintheworkfilearedisplayedontherightsideofthedialog.The
listofpartsgivesasurveyoftheentries.Byclickinganentrytwice,within
therighthandcolumn,anotherdialogwillbedisplayedwhichcontainsall
dataavailablewithrespecttotheentryconcerned.
Thisdatacanbeprocessedinthedialog.Whenclosingthedialog,theyare
imported,andIMMEDIATELYstoredinthefile.Endthedatarecordedby
clickingthecheckbutton.
310
Mar-12
Lesson2:CreatinganExternalPartsList
Note:Youaremodifying"live"data.Anychangesyoumakewillreflectinthe
reportandwillnotbackupdatethemodel.
3
Mar-12
Inordertohaveamorerecognizablelist,selectthemenuitemFile>Sort
fromthewithinthedialogandthiswillloadthesortingdialogshown
below.Enterthefollowingparameters:
FirstKey:POS_NUMBER
SecondKey:ITEMNO
Sort:Ascending
311
PressOKandthesortingwillbeappliedandthedatabaseinformationwill
returntothedisplayandbesortedaccordingtooursettings.
Nowthatyouhavethedataloadedandsorted,youwillcreatetheformat
forourreport.Next,youwilltouchonthebasicsofreportformatsandnot
specificsettingswithintheformatfileitself.
SelectthemenuitemSettings>EditPartListDefinitionfromtheProSteel
Partlistdialog.
Whenthefileselectiondialogappears,opentheMETRIC.FREEPARTS.LST
file.
ThiswillloadtheDesignerwindowforthespecificreportthatyou
selected.Fromhereyoucanchangetheformat,title,groupingofparts,
colours,fonts,rows,andcolumnsetc.foreachtypeofreport.Experience
withreportwritertoolsisrequiredinordertogeneratethedesired
formatsneededbyyourcompany.Closethiswindowaswewillleavethis
uneditedinthisexercise.
SelectFile>ExittoreturntothePartsListProcessorforStructural3D
dialog.
312
Mar-12
Lesson2:CreatinganExternalPartsList
Exercise3:GeneratetheReport
1
SelectthemenuitemDelivery>SelectSinglePartlistfromtheProSteel
Partlistdialog.Whenthedialogloads,selectMETRIC.FREEPARTS.LSTfrom
thelistofreportsandthenpressOpen
Note:Ifamessageregardingthepapersizeshoulddisplay,justcontinuewith
theprintingprocess.
2
Mar-12
ThePrintOptionsdialogshownbelowwilldisplay:
313
FromwithinthePrintOptionsdialog,changetheDirectTofieldtosend
thereporttoaPreview.PresstheStartbuttontobegintheprocessand
displaythereport.
SelecttheMagnifyingglassiconatthetoptozoominonthereports
content.Notehowthepartsaredisplayedinthereport.Whenfinished,
exitthisreportbypressingtheExitPreviewiconatthetopofthescreen.
Executetheprocedureagain,thistimechoosingadifferentreportformat.
Notethedisplayofthedata.
ExitanyreportsstillopenandwhenyoureturntotheProSteelPartlist
dialog,selectFile>Endtoexitthedatabaseeditor/reportgenerator.
Hint: ChangesmadeinthemodelafterthedatabaseisgeneratedWILLNOTupdate
thedatabase.Thereportshouldbereruntocapturetheneworchangeddata.
314
Mar-12
Lesson3:CreatingaDrawingPartsList
Lesson3:CreatingaDrawingPartsList
Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreateapartslistthatcanbedropped
directlyontothemodelor2Ddrawings&modifythepartlistinformationto
display.
Exercise1:CreatetheDrawingPartsList
1
SelecttheInsertDrawingPartlisttoolfromProSteel>Additions>Insert
DrawingPartlist,orclickontheInsertDrawingPartlisticonfromthe
PartlistandExporttoolbar(alsoaflyoutfromtheEdittoolbar).
Whenprompttoselectobjects,type"all"andpressENTER.
Thepartlistwillnowbeinsertedwhereveryouclickwithyourcursor.
Makesurethe"Ortho"optionisselected.
Onceinserted,thedialogboxappears.Setthefirstpageasshowninthe
graphicbelow.
Mar-12
WewillnowcreateacompletelynewlistbymovingtotheListStylestab.
UndertheBentleyfolder,wewillcreatea"Training"listusingtheCreate
button.
315
NowmovetotheLayouttabandmakesurethenewlycreatedlistis
selectedinthepulldownfield,thenclicktheeditingicon.
Thenewlyopeneddialogwillletuspersonalizethelayoutofthispartlist.
Setvaluesinthelowerareaasshowninthegraphicbelow.
316
Mar-12
Lesson3:CreatingaDrawingPartsList
Descriptionsofthefieldsintheabovedialogareprovidedinthetablebelow:
Name
Description
Stylename
Thenameofthecurrentstyle;allmodificationsarerelatedtothisstyle.
DisplayList
Here,youseeanoverviewofalldisplayedcolumnsofthepartslist.Theyaredisplayed
inthisorderfromthelefttotherightinthedrawingpartslist.
Clickonthisbuttontomodifythelineselectedinthedisplaylist(partslistcolumn).
Clickonthisbuttontoaddanewline(partslistcolumn)totheendofthelist.
Clickonthisbuttontoaddanewline(partslistcolumn)infrontofthehighlightedline.
Clickonthisbuttontodeletetheselectedline(partslistcolumn)fromthelist.
Clickonthisbuttontoopenthefooternotesandextrainformationdialogbox.
Thearrowbuttonsareusedtomoveitemsupordownthelistifrequired.
Mar-12
317
Name
Description
Valuessection
TextSize:Determinesthetextsizeindrawingunitsatascale1:1
HeightScaling:Increasestheheightofthelinesspacingbythisfactor.Dependingonthe
textstyle,thereadabilityofthepartslistisincreased
LeftMargin:Distanceofthetexttotheleftmarginatleftjustifiedinsertion.
RightMargin:Distanceofthetexttotherightmarginatrightjustifiedinsertion.
Offset:Distanceofthepartgrouppositionnumberentriesvsthegroupposition
number.
Rotation:Rotationofthewholelistbytheindicateddegrees
BlockSize:Indicatesafterhowmanylinesoftextahorizontallinehastobeinserted.
Thisonlyservesforacleareroverview.
Header:Additionaltitletoplaceontheverytopofthelist.
ColourFields
Hereyoucontrolthecoloursforvariouspartsofthetable.
MoveUp:Ifthisfieldischecked,thelistisrunningfromthebottomtothetop,i.e.the
columnheadersarebelow.
DivideGroups:Atgrouplists,thegroupsaredividedbyhorizontallines.Thesettings
under'BlockSize'donothaveanyinfluenceinthiscase.
AlignNumbersatright:Allnumericalvaluesarealignedtotherightmargin
Fillremainingwithzero:Allnumericalvaluesarefilledupwithzerosaccordingtothe
indicatedformatlengthanddigitsafterthedecimalpoint.
Header:Theheaderofthelistisused
TextStyle:Selectthedesiredtextstyle.PleaserefertotheMicroStationmanualfor
moredetailedinformationaboutMicroStationtextstyles.
Sort:Dependingonthefieldselectedhere,theoutputissortedinrisingorderfromthe
columnheaderonward.
Invert:Causesasortingindescendingorderfromthecolumnheaderonward.
UsePrefix:Atsorting,theentriesareseparatedinprefixandnumberandthensorted
separately
318
Mar-12
Lesson3:CreatingaDrawingPartsList
UsetheAddNewLineicontoopenuptheColumnsettingsdialog.
Completethepartlistinformationforeachfieldasshowninthefollowing
image:
Mar-12
319
DescriptionsofthefieldsintheColumnsettingsdialogareprovidedinthetable
below:
Name
Description
FieldName
Select(doubleclick)thedesiredfieldfromthedatafields.
Name1
Thenameofthecolumnheaderrespectivetothefirstnameifanentryhasbeen
indicatedininputfieldName2aswell.Therearetworowsareavailablealtogether.
Name2
Thesecondnameofcolumnheader.
Length
Enterthedesiredcolumnwidthintextsigns.Theexactcolumnwidthdependsonthe
selectedtextstyle.
Dec.Point
Thenumberofdesiredpositionsafterthedecimalpoint.ForImperialprecision,usethe
followingguide:
1/2"=1,1/4"=2,1/8"=3,1/16"=4,1/32"=5,etc.
TextSize
Enterthetextsizeofthecolumn.Ifyouhaveenteredthevalue0,thegeneraltextsize
oftheliststyleisused.
Colour
Enterthecolourofthecolumntext(colournumber).Ifyouhaveenteredthevalue1,
thetextcolouroftheliststyleisused.
Position
Enterthealignmentofthecolumn:Left,Center,RightorAutomatic.IfAutomatichas
beenselected,alltextsarealignedtotheleftandalldigitsarealignedtotheright.
Units
EntertheunitformatMetric,ImperialorAutomatic.IfAutomatichasbeenselected,the
defaultunitsofthedrawingareused.
Nowwewilllookatthefooter,usingtheFootericon.
Fromherewecancontrolthefootertext,itscolor,size,alignment,andso
forth.
Wecanalsouseafactorvaluetocalculatepercentageadditions.
Itisalsopossiblefromheretomodifythecolorandprefixoftheheaderof
group,subgroupandassemblylistings.
320
Mar-12
Lesson3:CreatingaDrawingPartsList
Descriptionsofthefieldsintheabovedialogareprovidedinthetablebelow:
Name
Description
Footer
Enterthedesiredfootlines.Youcanusepredefinedvariablesaswell.Thefollowing
variablesareavailableasfootlines:
$(N)Thenumberoflinesisindicated.
$(F)Multiplicationfactoradditionin%
$(L)Overalllengthofallpartswithoutaddition
$(LF)Overalllengthofallpartswithaddition
$(W)Overallweightofallpartswithoutaddition
$(WF)Overallweightofallpartswithaddition
$(P)Overallareatobepaintedofallpartswithoutaddition
$(PF)Overallareatobepaintedofallpartswithaddition
Mar-12
Addition
Percentagebywhichthedeterminedvalueshavetobeincreased.Theseincreased
valuescanbeoutputbymeansofthevariable$(?F).
Dec.Point.
Thenumberofdesiredpositionsafterthedecimalpoint.
321
Name
Description
Offset
Thedistancetothecorrespondingmargin.
Colour
Enterthecolourofthetext(colournumber).Ifyouhaveenteredthevalue1,thetext
colouroftheliststyleisused.
Position
Enterthealignmentofthetext:Left,Center,RightorAutomatic.IfAutomatichasbeen
selected,alltextsarealignedtotheleftandalldigitsarealignedtotheright.
Units
EntertheunitformatMetric,ImperialorAutomatic.IfAutomatichasbeenselected,the
defaultunitsofthedrawingareused.
GroupRow
InthePrefixinputfield,youcanindicateaprefixforthepositionnumbersofgroup
lines.IntheColourinputfieldyoucanspecifythecolourofthegroupline.Ifthevalue
of1hasbeenindicatedhere,thenormaltextcolourwillbeused.Thesesettingscanbe
madeseparatelyforgroups,subgroupsandassemblies.
322
Mar-12
ModuleSummary
ModuleSummary
Youarenowableto:
Mar-12
SetthedefaultsforPositioning
DefinethePositionFlags
PositiontheModel
Createapartslist
Editthepartslistdataandformat
Generatetheactualreport
323
Module Summary
324
Mar-12
DetailCenter
ModuleOverview
Nowthatthemodellingprocessiscomplete,youcanbegintheprocessof
creatingtheframedeliverabledrawings.Theentireprocessisautomatedthrough
theProSteel2DDetailCenter.
Note: Donotconfusetheterm2DorDetailCenterwiththeprocessofsteeldetailing.
All2Doutputiscontrolledfromwithinthisfunction.Thinkofthisasthe
"DrawingProductionCentre".
ThismodulewillfocusontheformatanduseoftheDetailCenter.Youwillbriefly
touchonthespecificsofthedetailstylesusedtogeneratethedesiredresults.You
willlearnwhatcomprisestheDetailCenterandhowtouseittoproduceyour
engineeringdrawings.YouwillalsolearnhowtousetheDetailCentertoproduce
ManualorCustomdetails.ThetruepoweroftheDetailCenterisevidentwhen
youusetheDetailCentertocorrectyourexisting2Ddetailsafterachangeismade
inthemodel.
Therearefourlessonsinthismodule.Eachlessonbeginswithalistofobjectives
thatdefinetheinformationthatyouwilllearninthatlesson.Anumberof
exercisesareprovidedineachlessonthataredesignedtoteachyouthetopics
listedintheObjectivessectionatthestartofeachlesson.
Warning:Itisrecommendedthatyoustartthe3DmodelwithaSeedfile(*.dgn)containing
therequired"measurement"variablesetting,"units"setting,Textstyles,
Dimensionstyle,Displayclasses,Partfamilies,Areaclasses,andsoforth.For2D
drawinggeneration,ProSteeltakesallrequiredtextanddimensionstylesspecified
intheDetailStylefromthemodelandbringsthemovertothe2Ddrawing.The
seedfile(*.dgn)usedfor2Ddrawingsshouldbefreeoftextanddimensionstyles
exceptfortheborder/drawingframetextstylestoavoiderroneousresults.
Mar-12
325
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Center
Module Prerequisites
ModulePrerequisites
ThiscourseisdesignedfortheexperienceduserofProSteelwhounderstandsand
iscapableofmodeling,grouping,andPartandfamilyandpositioningwith
ProSteel.Assuchtheparticipantshouldhaveaclearunderstandingoftheusage
ofMicroStationandtheWindowsoperatingsystem.
ModuleObjectives
Detail Center
LearnhowtoloadtheDetailCenter
LearnthebasicdesignoftheDetailCenter
Learnhowtoloadadetailstyletobegintheprocessofdetailingourstructure
326
Mar-12
Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre
Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre
Exercise1:LoadingtheDetailCentre
InthisexerciseyouwilllearnhowtoloadtheDetailCenter.
Mar-12
OpentheexamplemodelTRNMODEL.dgn,locatedintheProject
ProSteel_Metric.
LoadtheDetailCenter(ProSteelmenu>2D>DetailCenter).Thiswillload
theDetailCenteranddisplaythecomponentsfromthemodel,aswellas
theframesthatweregeneratedwhenyoucreatedtheWorkframes.
327
Detail Center
WhatistheDetailCenter?
InProSteel,userscontrolthecomplete2Ddrawingandplangenerationfrom
withintheDetailCenterfromafirstoverviewofthecomponentstothe
workshopdrawingwithmultiplechangesandmanipulations.Thinkofthe
DetailCenterasaprogramwithintheprogrambecauseitoffersmanymore
possibilitiesandoptionsthanonecanseeatfirstglance.
WhenyouopentheDetailCenterforthefirsttime,youwillseeaclearlyorganized
dialogboxwithjustafewsettingoptions.Youreallydonotneedanythingelseat
thispointifyouhavealreadycustomizedtheprogrambecauserightnow,you
wanttoderiveyourworkshopplansfromthemodel.However,ifyouwantto,you
canpushintotheinnermostdepthsofthedrawingderivationatanytime.Youcan
setagreatvarietyofoptions;requestinformation;andmonitorandcheck
drawings.Thephilosophybehindthisdevelopmentisthatyoushouldbeableto
obtainthesameresultinavarietyofdifferentways,thatyoucanchangemany
elementsandoptionsbutthatyoudonothaveto.Thehighestpossiblelevelof
flexibilityforyouastheuserduringthefinalphaseofthedesignthatisthe
DetailCenter.
Detail Center
328
Mar-12
Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre
InExercise2,youwilllearnthelayofthelandintheDetailCenter.
Level1:ThePartsTabOverview
Hereyouwillobtainanoverviewofthepartsofthemodelandtheirfunctional
associationsandrelationships.Youcanviewconstructiongroups,singlepartsor
wholeareasofthemodelallclearlystructuredinatreeformat.Thisistheplace
whereyoumanageandchangedetailstylesandlinkyourcomponentswiththese
stylesaswellasmanagethemodificationmechanism.Inaddition,the
DetailCenterislaunchedfromhere.
UnderthePartstabtherearethreedisplayareas:
Mar-12
329
Detail Center
Thefirstwindowislocateddirectlybelowtheiconsandisusedfor
informationalpurposesonly.Informationcannotbechangedoreditedin
thisdisplayandnoadditionalfunctionscanbeaccessedfromthisarea.
ThesecondwindowistheDetailStyleswindow.Thiswindowlistsallofthe
DetailStylescurrentlyloaded.FromhereDetailStylescanbecreated,
loaded,copiedorsavedwitharightclickwithinthewindowandselecting
theappropriateaction.TheDetailStylesarestoredherewithinfolders
calledthemes.ThesecanbeusedtosortDetailStylesbyclient,project,
etc.
Thelastwindowisalistofallactivemodelselements.Itisbytheactionof
draganddropfromthiswindowontotheappropriateDetailStylethat
creatingthe2Ddrawingsbegins.Thesorting,mentionedabove,canbe
donetotheitemsdisplayedinthiswindowsothatassigningthemto
DetailStylesbecomesfasterandeasier.Alsowitharightclickinthis
window,youcanupdateandopenany2Ddrawingsthathavebeen
created.
TheIconsareasfollows:
TheiconsonthePartstaballowyoutocontroltheinformationdisplayedbelowin
variousways.Eachoneservesaspecificfunctionandwillbecoveredinturn.
Whatisimportanttonoteatthispointisthateventhoughsomeiconsmay
appeartobeidenticalondifferenttabs,eachiconservesonlythetabithasbeen
Detail Center
330
Mar-12
Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre
placedonto.Forexample,theiconofthewrenchononetabmaynotofferthe
sameoptionsastheiconofthewrenchonanothertab.Or,thesortingononetab
maybedifferentfromthesortingonanothertab.
Thefirsticon
onthePartstabisusedtorightclicktheselectedelement(s)
andmoveit(them)alongtothenextstage(tab).Thechosenitem(s)shouldfirst
haveaDetailStyleassignedtoit(them)beforethisoptionisused.
Thefirsticononthefirstthreetabs,Parts,ViewsandInsert,maylookdifferent
buteachperformsthesamefunction.Adraganddropofanitemonitwillmove
ittothenextstage(tab).
Therecursiveicon
allowsforallparentandchildelementstobeselectedat
thesametimeinthesametreelikestructure.
Forexample,ifitemsweresortedshowingtheassemblystructures,elements
makinguptheassemblywouldbelistedaschildelements.Withrecursiveturned
onwhentheassemblyischosen,theindividualelementsformingtheassembly
wouldalsobeselected.
Note: Thisfeatureshouldbedisabledwhenassigningdetailstylestodifferent
elementssothatsinglepartsdonotreceivethesamestylefordimensioningas
theassembledcomponentsdo.
Therecursiveiconisavailableonthefirstthreetabsandeachworkthesameway;
however,eachtabcanhaveitsrecursiveoptionsetonoroffindividually.
Mar-12
331
Detail Center
TheSortingicon
controlshowthelistofelementsfromthemodelis
displayed.Whenthisiconisused,adialogappearswhichallowsyoutodefine
howyouwouldlikethelistsorted.
WithinthisdialogyoucanfirstchoosebetweenPSStandardandUserDefined.
TheProSteelstandardoptionisnecessarytobeabletoselectviewsandplans,as
UserDefinedmethodswillnotlistthese.
Oncetheinitialdisplaytypehasbeenchosen,ifUserDefinedwasselected,then
thewindowonthelefthandsidenearthetopbecomesavailableandhowitems
aresortedcanbeselected.
Thewindowtotherightandthearrowsdirectlybelowareusedtocontrolwhich
methodsforsortingaremadeavailableandinwhichordertheyareperformedif
morethanonemethodisselected.
Thefiltersofthisdialogboxallowyoutofurtherlimittheitemsdisplayedby
selectingandsettingupargumentsthatmustbemetinordertobedisplayed.
Twoseparatefilterscanbesetupandusedifrequired.
Thefinalpartofthisdialogallowsforoptionalsettingstobedefined.Hereusers
canchangetheSortOrdertoascendingordescendingmethods,orselectno
sortingatall.
Detail Center
332
Mar-12
Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre
TheoptionforShowentriesonly1xisalsoavailable.Thisoptionwilllistidentical
membersonlyonce.
NewpergroupwilllistidenticalmembersoncepergroupifShowentriesonly1x
isonandasmanytimesascreatedineachgroupifthisoptionisnoton.
TheGroupDisplaydropdownboxallowsfortheselectiontodisplayonlyparts,
onlygroupsorbothinatreestructure.
WithPreSortwilladddescriptionsasaparentheadingandsortitemsbelow
theseparentheadings.
ThelastsettingisNoemptyfolder,whichsimplyhidesanyfolderwithnothingin
it.
ProbablythebestusermethodforsortingthelistisbyPartDescriptionsorPart
Families.Keepinmindhoweverthatthedisplaytypeshouldbesetbackto
ProSteelStandardinordertoprocessanchorplans,elevations(orsections)and
plans.Alsoyouwillneedtokeepaneyeonwhethergrouporsingle'group
display'hasbeensetwhenusinguserdefinedsettings.
Thewrenchicon
isforsettings.Whenthisiconisselected,adialogboxwill
appearwithdifferentsettingsforyoutoselectfrom.
TheOverwriteprotectionoptionlocksdrawingsandstopsanyupdatesfrombeing
donetothem.Thisoptionshouldnotbeenabledunlessyouarecertainthatthe
drawingsbeingproducedwillbetothespecificationsrequiredandwillnotneed
tobemodified.
TheHideinpartlistoptionsimplyhidesanyitemplacedontoaDetailStyle.
ReopeningtheDetailCenterwillrefreshthelistshowingallelementsagain
includingthosethatwerehiddenusingthisoption.
Mar-12
333
Detail Center
Takeoverintoviewlistisnotarequiredoption,butdoesprovideameansof
movingitemsfromthePartstabtotheViewstabquicklyandefficiently.Withthis
optionenabled,anyelementplacedontoaDetailStylewillautomaticallybetaken
overtotheViewstabsavingyoufromhavingtodraganddroptothetoplefticon
forprocessing.
Inthefinalsectionofthisdialogboxaretwooptions:oneisforRestoremanual
changesifupdated,andtheotherisAlsodeletedimensions/labels.Itis
recommendedthattheseoptionsalwaysbeturnedon.Whathappensiftheyare
notturnedonisthatanymanualchangesordeletionstothe2Ddrawingwillbe
lostwhenanupdateisdone.Withthesechecked,allmanualchangeswouldbe
savedevenafteranupdatetothedrawinghasbeenperformed.
Thisicon
willrereadalltheinformationfromthemodelandrepopulatethe
displaywindowatthebottomofthePartstab.Itistheequivalentofclosingand
reopeningtheDetailCenter.Itisimportanttorememberhoweverthatitwillread
theinformationfromthewindowthatcurrentlyhasfocusandsoitisimportant
thatwhenusingthisoption,thewindowwiththemodelistheonecurrentlyopen
andselected.
Thisicon
willopenuptheDetailCenterExpress.Itisusedforautomatingthe
processof2Ddrawingcreation.Thisprocessinvolvesseveralpagesofinformation
beinganswered,externaltemplatesbeingmadeandthecreationofspecific
controlfiles.
Level2:TheViewsTabOverview
Detail Center
334
Mar-12
Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre
OnceaDetailStyleisassignedinthepartstabandtheitembroughtoverfrom
there(eitherautomaticallyormanually),itwillappearinthistab.
TheViewstab'smainpurposeistoallowyoutopreviewthedrawingsina
WYSIWYGmodetoadjusttheDetailStylesassignedtothem,meaningDetailStyle
adjustmentscanbemadeandseendynamically.Thisway,userscanbesurethe
DetailStyleissetupproperlypriortoinsertingtheselecteditemintoa2D
drawing.
Note: Thepreviewshouldneverbesavedasa2Ddrawingsinceitisnotdirectlylinked
tothemodelandcannotbeupdatedifchangesaremadeinthemodel.
TheIcons
Theiconsshownaboveare:2D;Recursive;Sorting;Options;andCustomview.
The2Dicon
willtakeanyitemswhicharedraggedanddroppedonittothe
nextstage.AtthispointtheseitemsshouldbeavailableundertheInserttab.
TheRecursiveicon
worksinexactlythesamefashionasitdidunderthe
Partstab.Howeveritwillaffectonlyitemsunderthecurrenttab.
TheSortingicon
worksinexactlythesamefashionasitdidundertheParts
tab.Howeveritwillaffectonlyitemsunderthecurrenttab.
TheOptionsicon
bringsuptheoptionsavailableatthispoint.Inthiscasea
smalldialogboxappearswithonlyoneoption,Hidepartinmodel.Thiswillhide
thepartinthemodelonceithasbeenmovedtotheInserttab.
Mar-12
335
Detail Center
TheCustomViewicon
allowsforthecreationofacustomdetailviewtaken
fromthemodelthatcanincludepositionflagsandweldmarksymbols.The
creationoftheseviewswillbeexplainedinmoredetailinadifferentsection.
TheDisplayWindows
Whenyourightclickinthedisplaywindowonapart,grouporview,asmallmenu
willappear.FromheretheoptionsPreviewandEditDetailStyleareavailable.
Thesearetheprimaryoptionsandthereasonforthistab.
Inadditiontotheseoptions,ausercancreateAdditionalViewsandDisplayInfo.
AdditionalViewsallowsforthecreationofacustomdetailviewtakenfromthe
modelthatcanincludepositionflagsandweldmarksymbols.Thecreationof
theseviewswillbeexplainedinmoredetailinadifferentsection.
Detail Center
336
Mar-12
Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre
TheDisplayInfooptionsimplyopensanotherwindowwithalltheinformation
abouttheselecteditem.Itisforinformationalpurposesonly.
ThefirstoptionisCreate2D.Whenusingthisitisthesameasthedraganddrop
ofselecteditemsontothe2Diconatthetopleftinthatitwillmovetheselected
itemsovertotheInserttab.
Level3:TheInsertTab(DetailBlock)Overview
TheInserttabiswherealltheparts,groupsandviewsgetplacedinto2D
drawings.
Thefirststepistostartandsaveanewdrawing.Then,youwillselecttheitemsto
beplacedinthisdrawinganddraganddropthemontheiconinthetopleft
corner.Thenextstepistoplacethe2DDetailwithinthenewdrawing.Once
finished,savethedrawingagainandprocessthesamewayadrawingisnormally
processedunderMicroStation.
TheIcons
Theiconsshownaboveare:DragandDrop;Recursive;Sorting;Options;Reload;
InsertAssistant;andExchange.
TheDragandDropicon
letsyouindicatewherethefilesshouldbe
draggedanddroppedintothedrawing.
Mar-12
337
Detail Center
TheRecursiveicon
worksinexactlythesamefashionasitdidundertheParts
tab.Howeveritwillaffectonlyitemsunderthecurrenttab.
TheSortingicon
worksinexactlythesamefashionasitdidundertheParts
tab.Howeveritwillaffectonlyitemsunderthecurrenttab.
TheOptionsicon
bringsuptheavailableoptionsatthispoint.Inthiscasea
smalldialogboxappearswithtwooptions.
Thefirstoptionwillremovethepartfromthelistonceithasbeenplacedintoa
2Ddrawing.
ThesecondoptiondetermineswhetherUSMarkNumberingwillbeusedornot.
Thefieldsbelowthesecondoptionareinformationalonly.
TheReloadsicon
window.
reloadsallthedetailblocksandupdatesthedisplay
TheInsertAssistanttool
canbeusedtoautomaticallyinsertitemsonto
multipledrawings.Thisrequiresacertainamountofsetupandisnotcoveredin
thebasiccourse.
TheExchangeicon
block.
opensadialogboxwhichletsyouexchangeoreditadetail
TheDisplayWindows
Detail Center
338
Mar-12
Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre
TherearethreewindowsundertheInserttab.Eachwindowisdescribedbelow.
Thefirstwindowisinformationalonlyandnoadditionfunctionsexistfrom
here.
Thesecondwindowdisplaysafolderview.Eachfolderrepresentsa3D
modelthathasbeenpreparedfor2Dinsertion.Thenameofthefolders
shouldbethesameasthenamesofthe3Ddgnfilescontainingthe
models.Arightclickinthiswindowwillallowyoutodeleteafolderor
'detaildictionary'completely.
Thethirdwindowdisplayseverythingcontainedwithinthefolderthathas
beenselectedintheabovewindow.Ifnofoldersareselectedthenthis
windowwillshownoelements.
Arightclickinthethirdwindowwillbringupasmalldropdownmenu.From
thereyougetfourchoices(dependingonthehighlightedelementwhentheright
clickisdone).
Insert2Dwillallowyoutodirectlyinserttheselectedobject(s)intothe2D
drawingwithouttheneedtodraganddroptotheiconinthetoplefthandcorner.
Previewwillbringupapreviewofwhatthedetailblockis.Thisisnotthe2Ddgn
andshouldnotbesavedbutratherdiscarded.Theblockshouldbeinsertedintoa
2Ddrawingandthensaved.
Mar-12
339
Detail Center
Deleteentryfromdetaillibrarywillremovetheselectedentriessothattheyno
longerareavailableinthewindowforselection.Iftheyneedtobeinsertedintoa
drawinginthefuturethenyouwillhavetogobacktoatleasttheviewtabifnot
furtherandbringthemovertotheInserttaboncemore.
DisplayInfoopensawindowcontaininginformationabouttheparticulardetail
block.Thewindowthatopensisinformationalonly.
TheSettingsTab
TheSettingstabisdedicatedtotheglobalbehaviouralsettingsofthe
DetailCenter,includingtemplatesandconfigurationfiles.
ColourCodingthroughoutthetabs
Detail Center
GREY:Partsnotprocessed
340
Mar-12
Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre
BLUE:Thedetailblockofthepartwascreated;itisnotinsertedinthe2D
drawinganddoesnotneedupdating.
YELLOW:Thedetailblockofthepartwascreated;itisnotinsertedinthe2D
drawinganditneedsupdating.
GREEN:Thedetailblockofthepartwascreated;itisinsertedinthe2D
drawinganditdoesnotneedupdating.
RED:Thedetailblockofthepartwascreated;itisinsertedinthe2Ddrawing
anditneedsupdating.
InformationWindow:
Thereisalsoaninformationwindow,whichwillbedisplayedifyourightclickon
oneofthecomponentslistedinthePartstablistandselectDisplayInfo.This
informationwindowisassignedtoallthreeworklevelsandshowsthecurrent
statusoftheentry.Dependingonthelist,thiswindowdisplaysthenameandtype
ofthepart,dataofdetailing,insertionlocation,currentstatus,andmuchmore.
ContextMenu
AsupplementtoeverylevelisalevelspecificContextMenuaccessiblethrough
therightmousebutton,whichlistsonlythosefunctionsthataresignificanttothe
respectivelist.Thisoptionoffersthefastestwaytoaccessacommand.
Mar-12
341
Detail Center
DetailStyles
Thedetailstylesarethecornerstoneoftheentiredetailingprocess.Theydescribe
howapartistolookasaworkshopdetailorhowthemodelistoappearasan
overview.Thecontentofthestylesisdescribedinsomedetailinthenextlesson.
Preview
Thedetailingofaselectedpartcanbepreviewedfromwithintheview'soverview
ordirectlyfromwithinthemodel.ThiswillcreateasmallMicroStationView
displayingtheexactresultofthedetailstylesettingsappliedtothispart.The
Detail Center
342
Mar-12
Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre
smalldrawingshowshowthepartwillbedetailed.Thiswindowanditsdrawing
canbeWindowsorqueriedforinformationbecauseitisanindependent
MicroStationdrawing.Sinceyoucannowopenthispart'sdetailstyle,youcan
tracktheeffectsofdifferentstylesettingsinrealtime.Youcallthisfinetuningof
thedetailstyle.Ifyouopenthepreviewforanotherpartyoudonothavetoclose
thiswindowfirst.Thecontentisupdatedautomatically.
OpentheDetailCenterPartSettingdialog(Parttab>Pressthe
DetailCenterSettingsicon).
Settheparametervaluesasshownbelow.
Whenfinished,clickthecheckmarktoclosethesettingsdialog.
Exercise3:LoadingaDetailStyle
Inthisexercise,youlearnhowtoloadadetailstyleinordertobeginthedetailing
process.Youwillalsobrieflylookatthespecificsofthedetailstyleitself.
1
Mar-12
FromwithinthePartstaboftheDetailCenter,selectanyStyleinthe
DetailStyleswindow.ThenrightclickthemousetodisplaytheContext
menu.
343
Detail Center
Fromthecontextmenu,selectLoad/Save>LoadStyle(s).
Whenthedialogappearstoloadastyle,selectthe
AUS_Engineering_Plansstyle.ThiswillloadthestyleintotheDetailCenter
underitsoriginalthemeorcurrentlyselectedtheme,dependingonthe
selectionmadeinthisdialogbox.
NowthattheAUS_Engineering_Plansstyleisloadedyouwillbriefly
reviewitscontent.Thiscanbedonebyeitherdoubleclickingthestyle
nameorhighlightingthestyleandthenrightclickingthemouseand
selectingEditDetailStylefromthecontextmenu.
OpentheAUS_Engineering_Plansstyleandreviewthecontentsofthis
style.
Thedetailingstyleoffersyousomedecisiveinfluenceoverthestyleofthe
detailingbecauseitisherethatyoudeterminewhatistobedimensioned,howto
dimensionit,whattextstoinclude,whethertoattachpositionflags,andsomuch
more.Over200parametersareavailabletospecifytheappearanceofyour
drawing.
Youcansaveandloadthesestylesindividuallyandevenimportorexportthem
fromthirdparties.Sinceitispossibletomanageentireparameterrecordsyoucan
Detail Center
344
Mar-12
Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre
createspecificstylesforspecificdetailingtasks(e.g.,foroverviews,workshop
plans,lifesizeddisplays,etc.)andjustselectthemlater.Yourmaintaskconsistsof
definingthesuitablestylesonce.Theprogramofferstheoptiontoimmediately
checkeachchangeusingapreviewfeatureuntildetailslookexactlylikeyouwant
themtobe.
Note: Understandthatcreatingadetailstylecantakesometimeandshouldnotbe
rushed.UsethePreviewfunctiontoverifythesettings.Allowsufficienttimeto
createthestyleforyourdesiredoutput.Intheend,timespentupfrontwillpay
offinquicktimesavingdrawingproduction.
SavingStyles
Normally,thedetailingstylesaresavedtogetherwiththedrawing.Thismeans
thatyoualwayshavetosaveyourmodelifthemodificationsofdetailingstyles
aretobekeptpermanently.Thereis,however,thepossibilitytowriteadetailing
styleasafileontheharddriveandtoreimportitfromthere.Thispermitsyouto
exchange,updateoreventransferthedetailingstylesofdifferentmodels.
Furthermore,youcancreateacollectionofdetailingstyles,andinthemodeluse
onlyaselectionofthosestylesthatarerequiredforthatmoment.
GeneralInfo
Ifyoudoubleclickonadetailstyle,adialogwithseveraltabsdisplaysinwhich
theindividualparametersareorganizedaccordingtodifferentareas.Someofthe
tabshavetabsthemselves,whichareusedforspecialsettings.Theseareusually
infrequentlyusedsettingsandarethusremovedbyafewextramouseclicks.You
donothavetotakecaretocloseallofthesedialogsbecausetheprogramcloses
themautomaticallywhenyouselectadifferenttab.
Mar-12
345
Detail Center
Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2D
DeliverableDrawing
Objectives
Theobjectivesofthislessonareasfollows:
Learnhowtoassignaviewtoadetailstyle.
LearnhowtoprocessaviewthroughtheDetailCenter.
FurtherusetheMultipleDocumentInterfacetocreateyour"deliverable"
drawing.
Completetheprocessbysavingyourdrawingandyourmodel,andreviewing
thedisplayoftheDetailCenterandusingittodeterminethestatusofaview.
Exercise1:AssigningaviewtoaDetailStyle
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoassigntheviewtothedetailstyle.
Detail Center
FromwithintheDetailCenterPartstab,selecttheFR1_TOPview.Withthe
viewhighlighted,draganddroptheviewontotheAUS_Engineering_Plans
style.TheViewinthePartstabwillhaveacheckmarknexttoit.Thisis
yoursignalthattheviewhasbeenassignedtoastyle.
PickontheviewFR1_TOPandthenwiththearrowonthehighlighted
framename,rightclickandaccessthecontextmenu.Fromwithinthe
contextmenu,selectDisplayInfo.Thiswillloadtheinformationdialogand
youwillseethestylenamedthathasbeenappliedtotheframe.
Closedialog.
346
Mar-12
Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing
Exercise2:ProcessingtheviewthroughtheDetailCentre
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoprocesstheviewFR1_TOPthroughthe
DetailCenter.
1
FromwithintheDetailCenter,selecttheViewstab.Whenthedisplay
changestothecontentsoftheViewstabyouwillseetheFR1_TOPviewin
thecurrentviewssectionofthetab.
AtthispointyoucanpreviewtheresultsoftheAUS_Engineering_Plans
detailstyle.HighlighttheFR1_TOPviewthenrightclickthemouseto
accessthecontextmenu.FromthemenuselectPreview.Thiswillopen
thepreviewofthedetail.
Note: Ifthetextsizesofthedimensionsanddescriptionsarenotproportionatetothe
drawing,youcanchangethis.Closethepreviewwithoutsavingthechanges.
Next,rightclickthemousewhileinthemodelandselectProSteel>Options.
HighlighttheShapes>ShapeLabeloptionandchecktheTextSizeandDistance
(try5mmfortextand3fordistance).
Hint: Atthistimeyoucanopenthedetailstyleusedtocreatetheviewbyselecting
EditStylefromthecontextmenuwhenyourightclickontheselectedviewand
makechangestothestyleandwatchasthechangesupdateinthecreated
view.Thisservesasagreatconstructiontoolwhendefiningdetailstyles.
Mar-12
Beforecontinuingthroughtheprocessyoumustclosethepreview
window.Todothis,presstheXinthecornerofthePreviewwindowand
whenpromptedtosavethecontentsofthepreview,pressNo.
ThenextstepinthedetailingprocessistopasstheviewontotheInsert
tabandallowProSteeltoprocesstheviewintoanintelligentblock.Backin
347
Detail Center
theViewstaboftheDetailCenteryoucaneitherdraganddropthe
FR1_TOPviewontotheStartdetailingofselectedPartsbuttonorhighlight
theFR1_TOPviewandrightclickthemousebuttonandthenselectCreate
2Dformthesubmenu.Thesystemwilltakeamomenttoprocesstheview
throughtheDetailCenter.
5
SwitchtotheInserttaboftheDetailCenter.InthesectionlabelledDetail
directorypicktheTRNMODELlisted.Thiswillrefreshtheviewandinthe
lowerhalfofthetablabelledDetailBlocks,yourFR1_TOPviewwillappear.
Atthispointtheviewisreadytoinsertintoadeliverabledrawing.
Exercise3:PreparingtheDeliverableDrawingtoAcceptyourDetailBlock
Inthisexercise,youlearnhowtocreateanew"deliverable"drawingandinserta
border.
1
Detail Center
FromtheMicroStationmenuselectFile>New.
348
Mar-12
Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing
WhentheMicroStationNewdialogdisplays,browseandselecttheseedfile
ProSteel3DV8iMetric.dgnfromprojectSeeddirectory.ThenclickOpen.
Mar-12
Afterthenewdrawingiscreated,saveTRNDET1.
Youwillnotbeabletoinsertthedetailintothenewdrawinguntilithasa
validdrawingname,asthenameislinkedtotheiteminthe3Dmodel.
ProSteelwillwarnyouthatthedrawinghasnotbeensaved.
349
Detail Center
Detail Center
Nowforthebordercreatenew2Dsheetmodel:fromMicroStationmenu,
selectFile>Modelstocreatenewsheetmodel.
350
Mar-12
Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing
Mar-12
NextstepistoReferencethebordersheet(File>References>Tools>
Attached).
BrowsetotheFormatdirectoryandselectA0QUER.DGN,thenclickOpen.
351
Detail Center
Settheattachmentasbelow.
NowwehaveanA0bordersheetwhichwecanReferenceinserted
FR1_TOP.Wecanreferenceotherplans,elevationordetailsinsertedto
Modeltothebordersheet.
ClosethedetailsheetTRNDET1.dgn.
Exercise4:InsertingyourViewDetailintoyourDeliverableDrawing
Inthisexerciseyouwilllearnhowtoinserttheviewintoyourdrawing,savethe
viewandmodel,andreviewthe2DDetailCentersettings.
Detail Center
OpenTRNDET1.dgn.FromtheMicroStationmenu,selectFile>Models
andselectModel.UsetheTopView.
FromtheDetailCenterInserttab,selecttherequiredversionofthe
FR1_TOPview,aseachtimeyouprocesstheviewyouwillcreateanew
dateandtimestampedversion.Nowmakethe2Ddrawingcreatedinthe
previousexerciseyourcurrentdrawing.Highlighttherequiredviewthen
rightmouseclickandselectInsert2Dfromthesubmenu.Afterdoingthis,
acheckmarkwillappearbesidetheview.
352
Mar-12
Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing
Theblockwillappearasaghostimageinthemodelarea.
3
Mar-12
Usethemousetopositiontheblockinthedesiredposition,thenleftclick
toplaceitinthedrawing.Whenfinishedtheviewshouldbeinthe
drawingandappearsimilartothefigurebelow.
353
Detail Center
Note:TheinsertpositioncanbesetwithintheDetailStyle.
Detail Center
SwitchbacktothePartstaboftheDetailCenter.Reloadthemodelintothe
DetailCenterusingtheReloadicon.NotethattheFR1_TOPviewisnow
highlightedingreen.Thisdenotesthattheviewhasbeenprocessed,
residesinadrawing,andisuptodate.
WithinthePartstab,highlighttheFR1_TOPviewthenrightclicktoaccess
thecontextmenu.FromwithinthecontextmenupickDisplayInfo.Note
354
Mar-12
Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing
howtheinformationdialogfortheviewnowcontainsthedrawingthat
thedetailresidesonaswellasthepath.
Mar-12
ToplacetheTOPPlaninthebordersheet:fromtheMicroStationmenu,
selectFile>ModelsandselectTOPPLAN.
355
Detail Center
Detail Center
Referencethemodel(File>References>Tools>Attached)andselect
TRNDET1.
356
Mar-12
Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing
Mar-12
Selectthemodelasshownbelow(livenestingon).
LocatethePlanintheborderasshownbelow.
357
Detail Center
Exercise5:InsertingaDetailintoaDrawingSheet
Inthisexerciseyouwilladdacomponentdetailfromyourmodeltoadrawing
sheet.
1
Fromthe2DDetailCenterPartstab,confirmthattheAUS_BEAMS
DetailStylehasbeenloaded.Ifithasnot,rightmouseclicktodisplaythe
contextmenu.Fromthecontextmenu,selectLoadDetailStyle(s).When
thedialogappears,selecttheAUS_BEAMSstyle.Thiswillloadthestyle
intotheDetailCenter.
FromwithinthemodelselectthebeamthatislocatedongridlineA.Right
mouseclickandselectPSSearch/SelectSinglePart.Thiswillhighlightthe
partinthecomponentlist.
Detail Center
358
Mar-12
Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing
Mar-12
Makesureyouselectthetoplevel(theGroupitem)fromthelist.
FromwithintheDetailCenterPartstab,selectthehighlightedcomponent
anddraganddropitontotheAUS_BEAMSstyle.Thecomponentwillhave
acheckmarknexttoit.Thisisyoursignalthatthecomponenthasbeen
assignedtoastyle.
FromwithintheDetailCenter,selecttheViewstab.Whenthedisplay
changestothecontentsoftheViewstabyouwillseethecomponentin
thecurrentviewssectionofthetab.
AtthispointyoucanpreviewtheresultsoftheAUS_BEAMSdetailstyle.
Highlightthecomponent,thenrightclicktoaccessthecontextmenu.
FromthemenuselectPreview.Thiswillinvokethepreviewofthedetail.
Closethepreviewwindow.Whenpromptedtosavethecontentsofthe
preview,pressNO.
ThenextstepinthedetailingprocessistoswitchtotheInserttaband
allowProSteeltoprocesstheviewintoanintelligentblock.Backinthe
ViewstaboftheDetailCenter,eitherdraganddropthecomponentview
ontotheCreateDetailBlocksbuttonorrightmouseclickandselectCreate
2Dfromthesubmenu.Thesystemwilltakeamomenttoprocesstheview
throughtheDetailCenter.
359
Detail Center
SwitchtotheInserttaboftheDetailCenter.UndertheDetailDirectory
node,selecttheTRNMODELlisted.Thiswillrefreshtheviewandinthe
lowerhalfofthetabundertheDetailBlocksnode,yourcomponentwill
appear.Atthispointtheviewisreadytoinsertintoadeliverabledrawing.
10 StartaNewBlankDrawingandsaveitasTRNDET2.
11 FromwithintheInserttaboftheDetailCenter,selecttherequireddate
andtimestampedversionofcomponentview.Youcandraganddropthe
viewnameontotheInsertDetailBlockbuttonlocatedatthetopofthe
tab,oryoucanrightclickandselectinsert2Dfromthesubmenu.
12 Theblockwillappearasaghostimageinthedrawing.Usethemouseto
positiontheblockintothedesiredposition,thenleftclicktoplacethe
blockinthedrawing.
13 Savethedetailsheet.Usingthewindowmenu,selecttheTRNMODEL.
Whenthisbecomesactive,saveitaswell.
14 SwitchbacktothePartstaboftheDetailCenter.Notethattheobjectis
nowhighlightedingreen.Greendenotesthattheviewhasbeen
processed,andnowresidesinadrawing.
15 InthePartstab,highlighttheobject,thenrightclicktoaccessthecontext
menu.SelectDisplayInfo.Notehowtheinformationdialogfortheview
nowcontainsthedrawingthatthedetailresidesonaswellasthepath.
Detail Center
360
Mar-12
Lesson3:ModifyingtheModelandAutomaticallyUpdatingtheDetailDrawings
Lesson3:ModifyingtheModelandAutomaticallyUpdatingthe
DetailDrawings
Objectives
Theobjectivesofthislessonareasfollows:
LearnhowtousethepoweroftheDetailCentertoupdatethedetailswhen
themodelchanges
Exercise1:ModifyingtheModel
Inthisexercise,youwillmodifythemodelandchangeashapesize.
1
OpenTRNMODEL.DGN.
Windowonfront530UB82crossbeamlocatedatgridlineA,atthetopof
theFR1frame.
Pickthe530UB82andedittheshape.Changetheshapetoa610UB125.
Whenthemodelupdates,pressthecheckbuttontoendthemodification
process.
ClicktheReloadicontoreloadthemodelinto2DDetailCenter.Notethat
thetwoviewsyouprocessedthroughtheDetailCenterarenowflaggedin
red.ThismeansthatProSteelhasreadthemodelfileandknowsthat
theseitemsareinsertedinadetailsheetandthattheynolongermatch
themodel.
Toupdatethedetailsheetwheretheseblocksreside,selectthetwo
blocksflaggedred(usetheCTRLkeytomakethemultipleselection).
Rightclickononeofthetwoblocksandwhenthecontextmenuopens,
selectUpdate2DDrawings.
Tocheckifthe2Ddetailhasbeenchanged,highlightthecomponent,then
rightclickandfromthecontextmenuselectOpen2Ddrawing.
Thedrawingassociatedtothiscomponentwillbedisplayed.Notethatthe
detailsheetnowreflectstheupdatesmadetothemodel.
Mar-12
SaveboththemodelanddetailsheetandclosetheDetailCenter.Also
notethatthemodifiedcomponentsnowappearingreenbecausethey
nowreflectthemodelagain.
361
Detail Center
Lesson 3: Modifying the Model and Automatically Updating the Detail Drawings
Detail Center
362
Mar-12
DetailStyles
ModuleOverview
TheDetailStylesprogramoffersyousomedecisiveinfluenceoverthestyleofthe
detailingbecauseitisherethatyoudeterminewhatistobedimensioned,howto
dimensionit,whattextstoinclude,whethertoattachpositionflags,andmuch
more.
Agreatnumberofparametersareavailabletospecifytheappearanceofyour
drawing.Youcansaveandloadthesestylesindividuallyandevenimportor
exportthemfromotherusers.Sinceitispossibletomanageentireparameter
recordsyoucancreatespecificstylesforspecificdetailingtasks(e.g.for
overviews,workshopplans,lifesizeddisplays,etc.)andjustselectthemlater.
Yourmaintaskconsistsofdefiningthesuitablestylesonce.Theprogramoffers
theoptiontoimmediatelycheckeachchangeusingapreviewfeature(see
DetailCenterPreview)untildetailslookexactlylikeyouwantthemtobeforyour
requirements.
SavingStyles
Normally,theDetailStylesaresavedtogetherwiththe3Dmodelofthedrawing.
Thismeansthatyoualwayshavetosaveyourmodelifthemodificationsof
DetailStylesaretobekeptpermanently.
YoucanwriteaDetailStyleasafileontheharddriveandreimportitintoother
models.Youcanalsoreplaceonlypartialsectionsofastyle.Thispermitsyouto
exchange,updateortransfertheDetailStylesofdifferentmodels.Furthermore,
youcancreateacollectionofDetailStylesanduseonlythosestylessuitablefor
yourparticularmodellingrequirements.
Mar-12
363
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Styles
Module Prerequisites
PartialLoadingofStyleParameters
If,forexample,youwanttocombinethedefaultsettingsfordimensioningand
thedefaultsettingsforlabellingoftwoexistingstylestocreateanewstyle,you
candothisbypartialloadingofpages.
Selectthedesiredpageintheselectiontreeandthencallthecontextmenuby
pressingtherightmousebutton.Nowyoucanreplacetheparametersofthe
currentlyselectedpagebytheequivalentparametersofanexistingstylefile.
Alternatively,youcanalsoloadallthepagessubordinatetothispagetoreplacea
muchbiggersetofparameters.
ModulePrerequisites
ThiscourseisdesignedfortheexperienceduserofProSteelwhounderstandsand
iscapableofmodeling,grouping,assigningPartdescriptionandPartfamilies,
positioningandusingDetailCenterwithProSteel.Assuchtheparticipantshould
haveaclearunderstandingoftheusageofMicroStationandthewindows
operatingsystem.
ModuleObjectives
Detail Styles
CreateAnchorplanstylesetting
CreateShapesingledetailstylesetting
CreateBeamGroupDetailstylesetting
CreateElevationDetailstylesetting
364
Mar-12
Example1:AnchorPlan
Example1:AnchorPlan
DefaultSettings
Mar-12
365
Detail Styles
Detail Styles
366
Mar-12
Example1:AnchorPlan
2DDisplay
Mar-12
367
Detail Styles
Detail Styles
368
Mar-12
Example1:AnchorPlan
Dimensions
Mar-12
369
Detail Styles
Thisdialogallowsustosetthedistancesfromthedetailtothefirstdimensionand
subsequentdimensions,foranumberofdifferentdimensioninglocations.
Detail Styles
370
Mar-12
Example1:AnchorPlan
Descriptions
Mar-12
371
Detail Styles
SampleAnchorPlanDrawing
Notethatallthedimensionsaretruelength,butthebaseplateshavebeenscaled
upsoyoucanseetherequireddetailoftheholes;otherwisethedimensions
wouldbetoosmalltosee.Wehavealsorequestedthatthegridsbedisplayed.
Detail Styles
372
Mar-12
Example2:SinglePartDetailStyle
Example2:SinglePartDetailStyle
2DDisplay
Mar-12
373
Detail Styles
Dimensions
Detail Styles
374
Mar-12
Example2:SinglePartDetailStyle
Descriptions
TheDescriptionsdialogforbothPositioningFlagsandWeldFlagsdoesnotrequire
anyinputaswehavetoldDetailCenternottoincludePositionandWeldflags
fromwithintheDefaultSettingsdialog.
Mar-12
375
Detail Styles
SampleShapeDetailDrawing
Detail Styles
376
Mar-12
Example3:BeamGroupDetail
Example3:BeamGroupDetail
DefaultSettings
Mar-12
377
Detail Styles
2DDisplay
Detail Styles
378
Mar-12
Example3:BeamGroupDetail
Descriptions
Mar-12
379
Detail Styles
Detail Styles
380
Mar-12
Example3:BeamGroupDetail
Dimensions
Mar-12
381
Detail Styles
SampleGroupShapeDetailDrawing
Detail Styles
382
Mar-12
Example4:MarkingElevationDetail
Example4:MarkingElevationDetail
DefaultSettings
Mar-12
383
Detail Styles
2DDisplay
Detail Styles
384
Mar-12
Example4:MarkingElevationDetail
Descriptions
Mar-12
385
Detail Styles
SampleMarkingPlanDetailDrawing
Detail Styles
386
Mar-12
AppendixABentleyProSteel
CourseSetup
ModuleOverview
ThisappendixprovidesstandardBentleyProSteelcoursesetupinstructions.An
overviewofthecourseisalsoprovided.
ViewTools
ThetoolsavailableintheProSteelViewtoolbarareasfollows:
OverviewTools
Name
Description
IsometricOverviews1
IsometricOverviews2
IsometricOverviews3
IsometricOverviews4
IsometricOverviews5
ViewTools
Name
Description
SelectView
Mar-12
387
View Tools
ObjectViewTools
Name
Description
ObjectViewatPoint
ObjectViewatCentre
FaceViewatPoint
FaceViewatCentre
ClipPlaneTools
Name
Description
ClipPlaneOff
ClipPlaneOn
ClipPlaneDistance
ClipPlaneFlip
ClipPlaneDefault
AnalysisTools
Name
Description
AnalysisEffectiveLines
388
Mar-12
ViewTools
ObjectUCSTools
Name
Description
ObjectUCSatCentre
ObjectUCSatPoint
FaceUCSatCentre
FaceUCSatPoint
DisplayClassesTools
Name
Description
DisplayClasses
Hide
HideGroup
HideExcept
HideGroupExcept
ProSteelRegen
AreaClasses
PartFamilies
ProcessStatus
Mar-12
389
Element Tools
ElementTools
ThetoolsavailableintheProSteelElementstoolbarareasfollows:
GeneralTools
Name
Description
Plates
Shape
Bolts
EndPlate
BasePlate
ShearPlate
Splice
PurlinConnection
Stiffeners
Haunch
WebAngle
BracingTools
Name
Description
BracingStatic
BracingDynamic
GussetPlate
390
Mar-12
ElementTools
StructuralObjectTools
Name
Description
Stairs
Frame
Purlins
Handrails
Trusses
Ladders
Joists
DistributeRoof/WallPanels
Mar-12
391
Edit Tools
EditTools
ThetoolsavailableintheProSteelEdittoolbarareasfollows:
GeneralTools
Name
Description
Drill
Modify
Copy/Move/Mirror/Align
Groups
UnfoldPipes
PrimitiveTools
Name
Description
Box
Sphere
Cylinder
Cone
Extrude
Rotate
ConicalPipes
Torus
392
Mar-12
EditTools
BooleanTools
Name
Description
Union
Subtract
Intersect
SubtractIntersectBody
PositioningTools
Name
Description
Positioning
PositionCompareParts
SearchParts
PartlistandExportTools
Name
Description
ProjectManagement
CreatePartlistDatabase
CreatePartlist
InsertDrawingPartlist
GroupContainmentList
NCData
ERPData
Mar-12
393
Edit Tools
Name
Description
Import
Export
CreatePartlistPart
CreateUserShape
DrawingInformationTable
CollisionDetectionTools
Name
Description
CollisionDetection
CentreofGravity
MotionSimulation
394
Mar-12
UtilityTools
UtilityTools
ThetoolsavailableintheProSteelUtilitytoolbarareasfollows:
GeneralTools
Name
Description
Workframe
ElevationSymbol
WeldingSymbol
ChangeLanguage
DetailTools
Name
Description
DetailCenter
DrawingBorder
2DSection
AutomaticCut
CrankedView
2DShortening
BenchMark
NativeFile
BatchNativeFile
Mar-12
395
Utility Tools
Name
Description
SolidFile
BatchSolidFile
396
Mar-12
DetailStyleDialogs
DetailStyleDialogs
Mar-12
397
398
Mar-12
DetailStyleDialogs
Mar-12
399
400
Mar-12
DetailStyleDialogs
Mar-12
401
402
Mar-12
DetailStyleDialogs
Mar-12
403
404
Mar-12
DetailStyleDialogs
Mar-12
405
406
Mar-12
DetailStyleDialogs
Mar-12
407
408
Mar-12
DetailStyleDialogs
Mar-12
409
410
Mar-12
DetailStyleDialogs
Mar-12
411
412
Mar-12
DetailStyleDialogs
Mar-12
413
414
Mar-12
DetailStyleDialogs
Mar-12
415
416
Mar-12
DetailStyleDialogs
Inthemainmenu,selectProSteel>ProSteelOptions.
IntheProSteelOptionsdialog,selectShapes>ShapeLabel.
CheckNote2.
Seethedialogonthenextpage.
Mar-12
417
418
Mar-12